JP7228547B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine which is provided with a shooting control means for controlling shooting of game balls in accordance with rotation of an operation means, and which can select an effect mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with shooting control means for controlling shooting of game balls in accordance with rotation of operation means (see Patent Document 1). This game machine includes an operation handle fixed to a game machine main body, and a shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle.
Also, conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of selecting an effect mode (see Patent Literature 2). In this game machine, an effect mode selection screen is displayed in response to the push button being operated during the customer waiting demonstration. During the display of the effect mode selection screen, it is possible to select one of the three types of effect modes.

JP 2014-18335 A JP 2019-180876 A

However, in conventional game machines, there is a risk that the operating handle will be damaged. That is, in the conventional game machine, depending on the rotational position of the operating handle, there is a risk that the finger hook provided on the operating handle may protrude outward from the edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, when the main body of the game machine is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook may contact the floor or the wall, and the operating handle may be damaged.
In addition, there is a possibility that the production effect may be lowered in the conventional game machine. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when the game start condition is satisfied while the effect mode selection screen is displayed, if the reproduction of the effect sound during the display of the effect mode selection screen continues even after the game start condition is satisfied, There is a possibility that the production effect of the sound effect related to the game is lowered.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to prevent damage to an operation unit and to suppress deterioration of a performance effect.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first invention comprises an outer frame, a main body frame attached to the outer frame, and a main body frame provided in the main body frame, in a range from an initial position to a maximum position. A rotatable operation part and a launch control means for controlling the shooting of game balls according to the rotation of the operation part, the operation part having a plurality of finger hooks protruding radially outward. wherein the plurality of finger hook portions have different projecting amounts, and when the operation portion is arranged at the initial position, the plurality of finger hook portions extend along the lower edge of the body frame. When the operation portion is arranged at the maximum position, the plurality of finger hook portions do not protrude further downward and do not protrude rightward from the right edge of the body frame. A first effect sound that does not protrude downward from the lower edge and does not protrude rightward from the right edge of the main body frame and is notified during selection of the effect mode as a effect sound, and a effect mode and a second effect sound that is notified when the selection of is confirmed, and if the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the first effect sound, the notification of the first effect sound is terminated in the middle. , the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started .
A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention includes an outer frame, a body frame attached to the outer frame, and an operation unit provided on the body frame and rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position. and a shooting control means for controlling the shooting of the game ball according to the rotation of the operating portion, the operating portion comprising a plurality of finger hook portions protruding outward in the radial direction, the plurality of have different protrusion amounts, and when the operation unit is arranged at the initial position, the plurality of finger hooks do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the body frame. and, when the operation portion is arranged at the maximum position without protruding to the right from the right edge of the main body frame, the plurality of finger hooking portions extend from the lower edge of the main body frame. A first effect sound notified during selection of the effect mode and the selection of the effect mode are determined as the effect sound without projecting downward and not projecting rightward from the right edge of the main body frame. and a second effect sound to be notified, and when the condition for starting the game is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound, the effect related to the game is performed without ending the notification of the second effect sound in the middle. Sound notification is started.
In the gaming machine according to the first or second invention, the plurality of finger hooks may protrude downward from the lower edge of the body frame when the operation unit is arranged at the initial position or the maximum position. Moreover, it does not protrude rightward from the right edge of the body frame. As a result, when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like , the finger hooks are prevented from coming into contact with the floor or the wall, and damage to the operating portion can be prevented.
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the game start condition is established during the notification of the first effect sound during selection of the effect mode, the notification of the first effect sound is terminated in the middle , and the game is not related to the game. Notification of the effect sound is started. This prevents the notification of the first effect sound from overlapping with the notification of the game-related effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the notification of the first effect sound interferes with the notification of the game-related effect sound.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, when the game start condition is satisfied during the notification of the second effect sound triggered by the determination of the selection of the effect mode, the notification of the second effect sound is terminated in the middle. The notification of the effect sound related to the game is started. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the production mode has been confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been confirmed .
Here, the outer frame corresponds to an outer frame unit 2 (outer frame) described later. A body frame unit (body frame), which will be described later, corresponds to the body frame. An operation ring 72, which will be described later, corresponds to the operation portion. The initial position corresponds to the initial position described later. The maximum position corresponds to the maximum position described later. A firing control circuit 425, which will be described later, corresponds to the firing control means. Finger hooking portions fa, fb, and fc, which will be described later, correspond to the finger hooking portions. A special game described later corresponds to the game. The production mode corresponds to production mode A to production mode C, which will be described later. A mode explanation voice, which will be described later, corresponds to the first effect sound. As the start condition of the game, the entry of game balls to the start ports 51 and 52 described later, acquisition of special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), etc. correspond. The effect sound related to the game corresponds to a pending winning sound, a variable effect sound, and the like, which will be described later. A mode determination voice, which will be described later, corresponds to the second effect sound.
It should be noted that "the notification of the effect sound is terminated in the middle " means that the effect sound cannot be heard, and that the reproduction of the effect sound is terminated (stopped) and the reproduction of the effect sound is stopped. and the volume is set to "0" (muted state) while the sound continues (the same applies hereinafter).

Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a risk that the burden on the player will increase. That is, in the conventional game machine, the operating torque of the operating handle is not set appropriately, and there is a risk that the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operating handle will increase and the burden on the player will increase.
In order to solve this problem, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, an operation unit that can rotate within a range from an initial position to a maximum position, and a game ball can be shot according to the rotation of the operation unit. and a firing control means for controlling the operating portion to rotate from the initial position to a predetermined reference position using an operating torque required to start rotating the operating portion from the initial position as a first operating torque. The second operation torque is the operation torque required to rotate the operation unit from the initial position to the maximum position. is larger than the first operation torque, and the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque and is less than or equal to twice the second operation torque.
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, the third operation torque is set to be larger than the second operation torque and not more than twice the second operation torque. As a result, the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is reduced, so that the operation torque of the operating means within the range from the initial position to the predetermined reference position is reduced to the range from the predetermined reference position to the maximum position. The operation torque of the operation means in the inside does not suddenly increase. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operating means is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Here, an operation ring 72, which will be described later, corresponds to the operation portion. A firing control circuit 425, which will be described later, corresponds to the firing control means. The initial position corresponds to the initial position described later. The maximum position corresponds to the maximum position described later. The first operation torque corresponds to the first operation torque described later. The predetermined reference position corresponds to a left-handed hitting reference position, which will be described later. A second operation torque, which will be described later, corresponds to the second operation torque. A third operation torque, which will be described later, corresponds to the third operation torque.
A gaming machine according to a third invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque.
In the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque is reduced, so that the operation torque of the operation means for starting rotation from the initial position is reduced from the initial position. A sudden increase in the operating torque of the operating means within the range up to the predetermined reference position is eliminated. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation unit is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, in the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect, the operation angle from the initial position to the predetermined reference position of the operation unit is defined as a first operation angle, and When the operation angle from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as the second operation angle, the first operation angle is half or less than the second operation angle.
In the gaming machine according to the fourth invention, it is possible to facilitate the operation of the operating section.
Here, the first operation angle corresponds to the first operation angle described later. A second operation angle to be described later corresponds to the second operation angle.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent damage to the operation unit and to improve the entertainment of the presentation.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the sorting apparatus from upper direction. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the sorting apparatus from the downward direction. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is a block diagram showing configurations of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a production|presentation control board. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of a special design lottery. It is a figure which shows the selection probability of a big-hit design. It is a figure which shows the selection probability of a small hit design. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes in the BIG bonus percentage according to set values; It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of the opening of the first big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows a second big prize winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a second big winning opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big winning a prize mouth closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of opening the second big winning opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing; 9 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing. 9 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing; 9 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing; It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the production mode A. It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the production mode B. It is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the production mode C. It is a figure which shows the transition of a screen during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows an example of a production|presentation mode selection screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the data structure of mode explanation voice; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the data structure of a mode determination voice; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition of sound effects when a pressing operation of various buttons is detected during reproduction of mode explanation voice; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of sound effects when a pending winning occurs during reproduction of a mode explanation voice or a mode determination voice; FIG. 12 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed; It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of an operation ring and a front frame unit. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of an operation ring and an inner frame unit. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to Example 2;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, a main frame unit (main frame) (not shown), and a game board unit 10. As shown in FIG.
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame unit 2 (outer frame) is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The body frame unit includes an inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) and a front frame unit 4 (front frame). The body frame unit (body frame) is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The body frame unit is arranged on the front side of the outer frame unit 2 . This allows the body frame unit to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2 .

The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The inner frame unit 3 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame unit 2 . A game board unit 10 is attached to the inner frame unit 3. - 特許庁This allows the inner frame unit 3 to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2 .
The front frame unit 4 includes a rectangular frame (front frame). The front frame unit 4 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front side of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the front frame unit 4 can open and close the front side of the inner frame unit 3 (in particular, the front side of the game board unit 10 attached to the inner frame unit 3).
Further, the front frame unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a. The transparent plate 4a is arranged substantially in the center of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when viewed from the front side. The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass.
Further, the front frame unit 4 includes a decorative portion 4b, a saucer unit 5, and a firing handle unit 6. As shown in FIG. The decoration unit 4b, the saucer unit 5 and the firing handle unit 6 are attached to the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame).
The decorative portion 4b is made of a resin material and has a shape that protrudes forward. At each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b, there is provided a sound removing portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 5) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed. A frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 includes a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls) and various operation means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, as various operation means, there are a production button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation section that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 5) that detects the pressing operation of the operation section. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 5) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 5) that detects the rotating operation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operating portion is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

The light amount adjustment button consists of two operating sections (operating section A and operating section B) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjusting switch 27 (see FIG. 5) that detects pressing operations of the operating sections A and B. , is composed of The light amount adjustment switch 27 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the pressed operating portion to the effect control board 300 each time the operating portions A and B are pressed.
The effect control board 300 changes the setting content of the light amount setting to any one of the first to fifth stages in response to the input of the detection signal from the light amount adjustment switch 27 .
The "light amount setting" is used to set the light amount (brightness) of various light sources for presentation (specifically, the light emitting elements constituting the various lamps 20 and 21, the backlight constituting the main image display device 31, etc.). there is It should be noted that the setting of the amount of light cannot be changed for the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60 and the light-emitting elements that constitute the performance display device 206, which will be described later.

The volume control buttons consist of two operating sections (operating section C and operating section D) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjusting switch 28 (see FIG. 5) that detects pressing operations of the operating sections C and D. , is composed of The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the pressed operating section to the effect control board 300 each time the operating sections C and D are pressed.
The effect control board 300 changes the setting content of the volume setting to any one of the first to fifth stages according to the input of the detection signal from the volume adjustment switch .
“Volume setting” is used to set the volume of sound (effect sound) output from various speakers 22 .

The cross key button consists of four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 5). The cross key switch 29 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the depressed operation portion to the effect control board 300 each time the operation portion is depressed.
The effect control board 300 changes predetermined setting contents related to the effect according to the input of the detection signal from the cross key switch 29 .

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700. FIG.
Here, as a prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like correspond.

(Configuration of firing handle unit 6)
Next, the configuration of the firing handle unit 6 will be described.
FIG. 66 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit; FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed;
Here, FIG. 66(a) shows a state in which an operation ring 72, which will be described later, is arranged at the initial position, and FIG. 66(b) shows a state in which the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position. .
A shooting handle unit 6 is provided on the body frame. Specifically, the shooting handle unit 6 is provided so as to protrude from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base 71, an operating ring 72, a coil spring 73, a face cover 74, and a firing stop button 77.

The handle base 71 has a substantially cylindrical shape and is fixed to the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). The handle base 71 is provided with a rotary shaft 71a and three guide shafts 71b. The rotating shaft 71a is provided along the central axis of the handle base 71 which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The three guide shafts 71b are provided around the rotating shaft 71a.
The operation ring 72 is rotatably attached to the handle base 71 . The operation ring 72 includes a ring portion 72a and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a.
The ring portion 72a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape (substantially annular/substantially ring-like) having an open top surface and a bottom surface.
The finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided so as to protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc have different sizes. In particular, the three finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc have different amounts of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a (hereinafter simply referred to as "protrusion amounts"). That is, the amount of protrusion is the dimension (height) from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a to the vertex (radial vertex) of each of the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc.

In this embodiment, of the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc aligned in the left-right direction when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, the left finger hook fa protrudes. The finger hooking portion fc, which is provided on the right side, has the largest amount of protrusion, and the finger hooking portion fb, which is provided in the middle, has the smallest protrusion amount than the finger hooking portion fa. It is larger than the part fc.
In other words, of the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc arranged in the vertical direction when the operation ring 72 is located at the maximum position, the finger hook fa provided on the upper side has a protruding amount. The finger hooking portion fc, which is the largest and is provided on the lower side, has the smallest amount of protrusion, and the finger hooking portion fb, which is provided in the middle, has a smaller protrusion amount than the finger hooking portion fa, and the finger hooking portion larger than fc.
That is, the amount of protrusion of each of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc is as follows: finger hook fa, finger hook fb, and finger hook fc (large protrusion → small protrusion). there is

A bearing hole (not shown) and a pair of guide holes 72b are provided in the bottom surface of the ring portion 72a. The bearing hole is provided along the central axis of the substantially cylindrical ring portion 72a. Each guide hole 72b is an elongated through hole curved along the circumferential direction. The pair of guide holes 72b are arranged 180° out of phase around the bearing hole.
The coil spring 73 has one end engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the handle base 71 and the other end engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the operation ring 72 . A coil spring 73 biases the operation ring 72 toward the initial position.
The face cover 74 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The face cover 74 is attached to the tip of each guide shaft 71b by screwing. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatably held between the handle base 71 and the face cover 74 . The face cover 74 covers (conceals) the open top surface of the ring portion 72a.
A firing stop button 77 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle base 71 . The shooting stop button 77 can be pressed by the player.

The operation ring 72 is attached to the handle base 71 with the rotary shaft 71a inserted through the bearing hole and the guide shaft 71b inserted through the guide hole 72b. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatable with respect to the handle base 71 around the rotary shaft 71a. At this time, the rotation range of the operation ring 72 is restricted by the guide shaft 71b inserted through the guide hole 72b.
That is, as described above, the operating ring 72 is always biased counterclockwise when viewed from the front side by the elastic force of the coil spring 73 . Therefore, when the operation ring 72 is not rotated, one end surface of each guide hole 72b contacts the guide shaft 71b. As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the operating ring 72 is restricted, and the operating ring 72 is placed (stationary) at the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation ring 72 can be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side by being rotated against the bias (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 . Then, when the amount of clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72 reaches a predetermined amount, the other end surface of each guide hole 72b comes into contact with the guide shaft 71b. As a result, the clockwise rotation of the operating ring 72 is restricted, and the operating ring 72 is placed at the maximum position (stationary).
On the other hand, when the rotating operation of the operating ring 72 is finished (stopped), the operating ring 72 is returned to the initial position by the biasing (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 .
As described above, the operation ring 72 can be rotated by the player. At this time, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72 by putting his/her fingers on the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc.
In particular, the operation ring 72 can be rotated (displaced/operated) within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 66(a)) to the maximum position (see FIG. 66(b)).
As will be described later, in the game area 30, there are a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a left path (left hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow down. A right path (right hitting area) is configured.
A game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 in response to the rotation operation of the operation ring 72 passes through a shooting passage (not shown) and flows into the game area 30 . At this time, when the momentum of the shot game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the shooting passage flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage passes through a guide passage (not shown) and flows into the right path.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411 (see FIG. 5), a touch sensor 412 (see FIG. 5), and a firing stop switch 413 (see FIG. 5).
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotational manipulation of the manipulation ring 72 (the angle by which the manipulation ring 72 is rotationally manipulated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotating shaft (not shown) and a resistor (not shown) whose resistance value changes according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating shaft. there is The rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the bearing hole of the operation ring 72 . As a result, the rotary shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotational operation of the operation ring 72 , and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the rotational operation amount of the operation ring 72 .
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection section 421 (see FIG. 6). The operation detection unit 421 detects a rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the operation ring 72 based on a change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the ejection volume 411 .

The touch sensor 412 detects contact (holding) of the operation ring 72 by the player based on changes in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 6) when the player's contact with the operation ring 72 is detected (the touch signal is set to a high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops outputting the touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the touch signal low level) when the player's contact with the operation ring 72 is not detected.
The firing stop switch 413 detects pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 . Then, the firing stop switch 413 outputs a firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 when the pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 is not detected (sets the firing stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, the firing stop switch 413 stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (making the firing stop signal low level) when the pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 is detected.

(Positional relationship between operation ring 72 and body frame)
Next, the positional relationship between the operation ring 72 and the body frame will be described.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 68, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the lower edges of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). does not protrude below Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the lower edges of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). does not protrude below
Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). . Further, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). .
As a result, even when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc do not come into contact with the floor or the like, and damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72) can be prevented. It becomes possible.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) are Does not protrude below the lower edge of the frame. That is, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the front frame unit 4 (front not protrude below the lower edge of the frame). Further, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the inner frame unit 3 (inner not protrude below the lower edge of the frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the body frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 68, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, each finger hooking portion fa, fb, fc (top portion) is positioned above the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). does not protrude to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, each finger hooking portion fa, fb, fc (top portion) is positioned from the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). does not protrude to the right.
Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). . Further, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, each of the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portion) does not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). .
As a result, even if the body frame accidentally collides with a wall or the like, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc do not come into contact with the wall or the like, preventing damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72). can be prevented.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) are Does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame. That is, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the front frame unit 4 (front frame) does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame. Further, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame.
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position for the finger hooking portion fa (tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa) having the largest protrusion amount among the three finger hooking portions fa, fb, and fc. It is configured not to be positioned at the lowest point in the rotation orbit of the finger hook portion fa (tip portion of the finger hook portion fa) when the finger hook portion fa is on the finger hook portion fa.
Here, the "rotational path of the finger hooking portion fa (tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa)" is defined as the rotation path of the finger hooking portion fa (finger hooking portion fa) when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position. tip) is drawn by the trajectory.
In the present embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hooking portion fa (the tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa) rotates the finger hooking portion fa (the tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa). Located at the lowest point in the trajectory. Further, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, the finger hooking portion fa (the tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa) is positioned at the maximum position in the rotation orbit of the finger hooking portion fa (the tip portion of the finger hooking portion fa). Placed at a position higher than the lower point.
This makes it easier for the player to put his/her finger on the finger-holding portion fa, and as a result, the operation ring 72 can be easily rotated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the dimension (distance) D1 from the rotation center (rotational axis 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fa is set to 53.4 [mm]. there is Also, the dimension (distance) D2 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the top of the finger hook portion fb is set to 45.6 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) D3 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the top of the finger hook portion fc is set to 39.3 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) E from the center of rotation (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the edge (end in the radial direction) of the ring portion 72a is set to 34.6 [mm].
In particular, the dimension (distance) F from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 40.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) G from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 49.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension F<dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc is positioned above the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). It no longer protrudes outward. Also, the dimension D2<the dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb protrudes outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). no more to do.
Furthermore, the dimension (distance) H from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 45.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) I from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 51.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension H<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc is positioned above the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). It no longer protrudes outward. Also, the dimension D2<the dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb protrudes outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). no more to do.

(Operation torque of operation ring 72)
Next, the operating torque of the operating ring 72 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of setting the operation torque according to the first embodiment. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of setting the operation torque according to the second embodiment.
In the following description, the operation torque required to start rotating the operation ring 72 from the initial position is referred to as "first operation torque". That is, the first operation torque is the operation torque required for starting the movement of the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position. Therefore, when the operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position side) acting on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position reaches the first operation torque, the operation ring 72 rotates toward the maximum position side. Start.
Further, the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is referred to as "second operation torque". That is, the second operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the left-handed reference position. Therefore, when the second operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the left-handed reference position.
Here, the "left-handed reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be shot to the left-hand path, which will be described later. In particular, the left-handed reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 that makes it possible to stably shoot the game ball to the left-hand path. In this embodiment, the center (center) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 from which the game ball is to be shot with respect to the left path is defined as the left-handed reference position.

Further, the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is referred to as "third operation torque". That is, the third operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the maximum position. Therefore, when the third operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position side) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the maximum rotation position and the right-handed reference position match. The "right-handed reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be shot to the right-hand path, which will be described later. In particular, the right-handed reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 that makes it possible to stably shoot the game ball to the right-hand path.
Note that the maximum rotation position and the right-handed reference position may not match each other. That is, as the right-handed reference position, the center position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 from which the game ball will be shot to the right-hand path may be defined. do not have.

In this embodiment, the second operation torque is larger than the first operation torque. Also, the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque. In particular, the third operation torque is less than or equal to twice the second operation torque.
As a result, the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque becomes small, and the operation ring 72 is at the left-handed reference position relative to the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the left-handed reference position. to the maximum position (right-handed reference position), the operation torque does not suddenly increase. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque.
As a result, the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque becomes small, and the operation ring 72 moves from the initial position to the left-handed reference position with respect to the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 to start moving from the initial position. A sudden increase in the operating torque during rotation is eliminated. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 70, in Example 1, the first operation torque = 6.8 [N mm], the second operation torque = 13.6 [N mm], the third operation torque = 23.8 [N・mm].
Further, as shown in FIG. 71, in Example 2, the first operation torque=27.2 [N.mm], the second operation torque=54.4 [N.mm], and the third operation torque=95.2. [N·mm].
On the other hand, in the comparative example, the first operation torque = 31.0 [N-mm], the second operation torque = 69.0 [N-mm], and the third operation torque = 152.0 [N-mm]. there is
As a result, in Examples 1 and 2, compared with the comparative example, the operation torque curve (curve indicating the relationship between operation torque and position) can be flattened, and the operation ring 72 can be rotated from the initial position to the maximum position. When operating, the operation torque does not suddenly increase, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In particular, in the first embodiment, as compared with the second embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the maximum position, the amount of change in the operation torque is small, so the burden on the player can be further reduced. becomes.

(Rotation angle of operation ring 72)
Next, the rotation angle of the operation ring 72 will be explained.
In the following description, the operation angle (rotational angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position will be referred to as a "first operation angle". That is, when the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position is rotated by the first operation angle (rotated toward the maximum position side), the operation ring 72 is arranged at the left-handed reference position.
Further, the operation angle (rotational angle) from the initial position to the maximum position of the operation ring 72 is defined as a "second operation angle". That is, when the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position is rotated by the second operation angle (rotated toward the maximum position side), the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the first operation angle is within the range of 45° to 60°, and the second operation angle is within the range of 100° to 120°. In particular, the first operation angle is half or less than the second operation angle.
This makes it possible for the player to easily shoot the game ball to the right path.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the sorting device is viewed from above. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the sorting device viewed from below.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached inside the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4 . A player can visually recognize a later-described game board 11 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided at substantially the center of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided at substantially the center of the game board 11 . The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which the game balls shot out according to the rotation operation of the shooting handle unit 6 flow down. In the game area 30, there are a left path r1 formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) and a path r1 formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) as paths along which game balls flow down. A formed right path r2 is configured.
A board surface lamp 21 (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11 . The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effects images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a displays three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first production pattern z1 (not shown) and a second production pattern z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first production pattern z1 includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to execute variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1.
In the present embodiment, each first effect symbol z1 includes any one of the identification information "1" to "7". That is, as the first effect pattern z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, seven types of first effect pattern z1 (first effect pattern z1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined. there is In addition, as the first effect pattern z1 corresponding to the second special pattern lottery, seven types of first effect pattern z1 (first effect pattern z1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined. there is
The second effect pattern z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the production patterns z1 and z2 means that the first production pattern z1 fluctuates in each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design z2 fluctuates in the second production design display area a4. It is displayed smoothly.
In this embodiment, during the variable display of the production patterns z1 and z2, the type of the first production pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position is changed in each of the first production pattern display areas a1 to a3, or the first While the production pattern z1 is displayed in a moving state (moving/scrolling state), the type of the second production pattern z2 displayed in the second production design display area a4 is changed (specifically, The color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially.
The stop display of the production patterns z1 and z2 means that the first production pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design is displayed in the second production design display area a4. The effect symbol z2 is displayed to stop.
In this embodiment, during the stop display of the production patterns z1 and z2, the first production pattern z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first production pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the second production In the symbol display area a4, one type of second effect symbol z2 is stopped (specifically, the color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a combination of the first production pattern z1 stop-displayed in the three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second production design z2 stop-displayed in the second production design display area a4 produces a special design. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure reserved symbol display areas b1 to b3 (not illustrated) in which reserved symbols h (not illustrated) are displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information during the notification display (variation display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the reserved design display area b2, a reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 1 starting information in which the later-described starting determination (notification display) is reserved is displayed. In the reserved design display area b3, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 starting information in which the start judgment (notification display) is reserved is displayed.

The left path r1 includes a first path part ra, a second path part rb provided downstream of the first path part ra, a third path part rc provided downstream of the second path part rb, is composed of
The first path portion ra extends from the exit/end portion of the launch path r3 (the entrance/start portion of the left path r1) to the warp entrance 72 (the beginning portion of the second path portion ra). It is a route that constitutes the section to
A plurality of interference members (regulation members) p are provided along the direction in which the game ball flows down the first path portion ra. Each interference member p is provided on the board surface of the game board 11 (specifically, the front surface of the member that constitutes the first path portion ra). Specifically, each interference member p is formed in a columnar shape and is provided so as to protrude from the board surface of the game board 11 toward the front side. Each interference member p interferes with the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra (regulates the game ball from flowing down the first path ra).
In particular, each interference member p is formed integrally with the board surface of the game board 11 (specifically, the front surface of the member that constitutes the first path portion ra) from a material such as resin, and it is impossible to adjust the angle thereof. It is possible (difficult). In other words, each interference member p cannot adjust (specifically, adjust the angle by deformation) the interference state/interference state (regulation state/regulation state) with respect to the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra ( difficult).
The inner surfaces of the pair of side walls forming the first path portion ra are configured to include a plurality of curved surfaces. Each curved surface is curved so as to be convex outward so as to surround each interference member ra. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra is guided toward each interference member p by each curved surface.
A game ball flowing down the first path portion ra collides with each interference member p and passes through either the left side or the right side of the interference member p. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path portion ra is decelerated each time it collides with each interference member p, and flows down while meandering.
Here, in the first path portion ra, as a member that interferes with the flowing game ball (a member that regulates the flow of the game ball), the interference state / interference state (regulation state / regulation state) with respect to the game ball is adjusted (specifically Specifically, there is no member that makes it possible (easily) to adjust the angle by deformation. That is, in the first path portion ra, a member (for example, a , nails, windmills, etc.) are not provided.

The second route portion rb is a route forming a section from the end portion of the first route portion ra to the beginning portion of the third route portion rc in the left route r1.
The second path portion rb is provided with a plurality of guide pieces g along the direction in which the game ball flows down. Each guide piece g is provided on the inner surface of a pair of side walls forming the second path portion rb. Specifically, each guide piece g is formed in a wedge shape when viewed from the front, and is provided so as to protrude from one side wall toward the other side wall of a pair of side walls constituting the second path portion rb. It is In this embodiment, in the pair of side walls that constitute the second path portion rb, a plurality of guide pieces h are provided so as to alternate left and right along the direction in which the game ball flows down. Each guide piece g interferes with the game ball flowing down the second path portion rb (regulates the flow of the game ball on the second path rb).
A game ball flowing down the second path portion rb is guided toward the other side wall by each guide piece g provided on one side wall, and is guided toward the other side wall by each guide provided on the other side wall. It is guided towards one side wall by the piece g. As a result, the game ball flowing down the second path portion rb is decelerated each time it collides with each guide piece g, and flows down while meandering.
Here, in the second path portion rb, as in the first path portion rb, there is an interference state/interference state (restriction There is no member that makes it possible (easy) to adjust (specifically, adjust the angle by deformation). That is, in the second path portion rb, a member (for example, , nails, windmills, etc.) are not provided.

The third route portion rc is a route forming a section from the end portion of the second route portion ra to the first start port 51 or the outlet port 58, which will be described later, in the left route r1. Here, the third route portion rc includes a route (hereinafter referred to as "specific route") forming a section from a lower discharge port 79a to the first starting port 51, which will be described later.
In the third path part rc, except for a specific path, as a member that interferes with the flowing game ball (a member that regulates the flow of the game ball), the interference state / interference state (regulation state / regulation state) with respect to the game ball A member is provided that enables (easily) adjustment (specifically, angle adjustment by deformation).
Specifically, in the third path portion rc, except for a specific path, a material that can (easily) be deformed, such as metal, is used as a member that interferes with the flowing game ball (a member that regulates the flowing down of the game ball). A member (for example, a nail, a windmill, etc.) is provided.
In the present embodiment, a plurality of nails, pinwheels, etc. are arranged in the third path portion rc (except for the specific path) so as to guide the game balls toward the winning openings (ball entrances) 51, 57a to 57d. It is

A sorting device 70 is provided on the left route r1. The sorting device 70 provides a path (specifically, a specific path (lower discharge port 79a)) that makes it easier for the entering (flowing) game ball to enter the first start port 51 described later, and The ball is sorted to one of the paths that make it difficult to enter the first starting port 51 (specifically, a non-specific path (upper discharge port 78b) to be described later).
As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 , the sorting device 70 includes a warp path section 71 , a stage section 76 and a sorting section 77 .
The warp path portion 71 guides, to the stage portion 76, the game balls that enter the sorting device 70 among the game balls flowing down the left path r1. The warp path section 71 includes a warp entrance 72 , a warp blade accessory 73 that opens and closes the warp entrance 72 , a guide path 74 and a spiral path 75 .
The warp entrance 72 is provided at the end of the first path portion ra, and allows game balls that have passed through the first path portion ra to enter (game balls that flow down the right path r2 cannot enter). possible). A game ball entering the warp entrance 72 flows into the starting end of the guide path 74 .
The warp vane accessory 73 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the warp entrance 72, an open state that makes it possible (easy) to enter the game ball into the warp entrance 72, It is possible to displace to The warp vane accessory 73 is opened and closed by a warp vane solenoid 67 (see FIG. 5).
The warp feather accessory 73 is always opened and closed (displaced to an open state or a closed state) in an integrated pattern while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. As a result, at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the terminal end of the first path part ra is guided by the warp blade accessory 73 and enters the warp entrance 72. . On the other hand, at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is closed, the game ball that reaches the end of the first path portion ra flows into the second path portion rb without entering the warp entrance 72. .

The guiding path 74 guides a game ball entered from the warp entrance 72 to the spiral path 75 . The guide path 74 extends along the up-down direction (vertical direction). The lower end of the guide path 74 is open and positioned above the starting end of the spiral path 75 . As a result, the game ball ejected from the lower end of the guide path 74 falls to the starting end of the spiral path 75 .
A warp switch 111 (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the guide path 74 . The warp switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the warp entrance 72 (entering the game ball into the warp entrance 72). The main control board 200 executes predetermined processing according to the input of the detection signal from the warp switch 111 .
The spiral path 75 guides the game ball ejected from the guide path 74 to the stage portion 76 . The spiral path 75 is a ramp extending spirally when viewed from above. As a result, the acceleration of the game ball passing through the spiral path 75 is suppressed. A drop hole 75 a is provided at the terminal end of the spiral path 75 . The drop hole 75 a is arranged above the left end of the stage portion 76 . As a result, the game ball dropped from the drop hole 75 a falls to the left end of the stage portion 76 .

The stage portion 76 causes the game ball ejected from the warp path portion 71 to oscillate (roll in a swaying manner), and then guides it to the distribution portion 77 . The stage portion 76 is formed in a gutter shape (a gutter shape with an open upper surface) extending in the left-right direction.
In particular, the bottom surface of the stage portion 76 is inclined (curved) so that the central portion in the left-right direction is low and each end portion in the left-right direction is high. In addition, three guide grooves (not shown) are provided in the center portion of the bottom surface of the stage portion 76 in the left-right direction. Each guide groove extends linearly in the front-rear direction and slopes downward toward the back side.
A plurality of projecting portions f are provided in a region (hereinafter referred to as a “left region”) on the left side of the stage portion 76 in the left-right direction (the side where the game ball that has passed through the warp path portion 71 enters). Each projecting portion f is provided on the inner surface of a pair of side walls that constitute the stage portion 76 . Specifically, each protrusion f is provided so as to protrude from one side wall toward the other side wall of a pair of side walls (front side wall and back side side wall) that constitute the stage portion 76 . It is In this embodiment, in the pair of side walls of the left side area, a plurality of protrusions f are provided so as to alternate back and forth along the direction in which the game ball flows down. Each projecting portion f interferes with a game ball rolling in the left area.
On the other hand, a projecting portion f is provided in a region on the right side of the stage portion 76 in the left-right direction (opposite side to the side where the game ball that has passed through the warp path portion 71 enters) (hereinafter referred to as a “right side region”). not That is, in the right region, the inner surface of each side wall is formed flat.
Out of the pair of side walls forming the stage section 76, the side wall on the rear side is provided with a discharge port 76a at the central portion in the left-right direction. The discharge port 76a is a substantially rectangular through hole when viewed from the front. The discharge port 76a is formed so as to allow passage (entry) of game balls guided (guided) by three guide grooves. The discharge port 76a is arranged on the front side of a receiving portion 78, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball ejected from the ejection port 76 a flows into the receiving portion 78 .
The game ball that has flowed into the left end of the stage portion 76 swings in the left-right direction on the bottom surface of the stage portion 76 after passing through the left-side area, is then guided by one of the guide grooves, and exits through the discharge hole 76a. and discharged to the receiving portion 78 . At this time, the game ball passing through the left side area collides with each protrusion f provided on one side wall, and is repelled toward the other side wall and is provided on the other side wall. By colliding with each of the projections f on which it is located, it is repelled toward the side wall on one side. As a result, the game ball passing through the left region has an irregular flow state (flow state). Also, the time during which the game ball stays (rocks) on the bottom surface of the stage portion 76 changes according to the speed (momentum) when the game ball passes through the left area. As a result, the game balls passing through the stage portion 76 flow irregularly.

The distribution unit 77 distributes the game balls discharged from the stage unit 76 to one of an upper discharge port 78b and a lower discharge port 79a, which will be described later. The allocating portion 77 includes a receiving portion 78 , a center passage 79 and a shutter accessory 80 .
The receiving part 78 is formed in a box shape and receives the game ball discharged from the discharge port 76a. In the receiving portion 78, an upper discharge port 78b is formed by opening the front surface thereof. The upper discharge port 78b is provided below the stage portion 76 and above a roof member 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, and opens toward the front side. 3 and 4, illustration of the roof member 81 is omitted.
The bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 is provided with a center passage inlet 78a. A game ball entering the center passage entrance 78 a flows into the starting end of the center passage 79 .
The shutter accessory 80 opens and closes the center passage entrance 78a. In particular, the shutter accessory 80 distributes the game balls that have flowed into the receiving portion 78 to either the center passage inlet 78a (center passage 79) or the upper discharge port 78b.
Specifically, the shutter accessory 80 is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the center passage entrance 78a, and makes it possible (easy) to enter the game ball into the center passage entrance 78a. It is possible to displace to the open state and the open state. The shutter accessory 80 is opened and closed by a shutter accessory solenoid 68 (see FIG. 5).
The shutter accessory 80 is always opened and closed (displaced to an open state or a closed state) in an integrated pattern while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. As a result, the game ball that has reached the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 flows (drops) into the center passage entrance 78a at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the open state. On the other hand, at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is closed, the game ball that reaches the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 is discharged from the upper discharge port 78b without flowing into the center passage entrance 78a. At this time, the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b is discharged to a position above the roof member 81 in the third path portion rc. At this time, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to enter the first starting port 51.例文帳に追加That is, the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b flows into a path (hereinafter referred to as "non-specific path") that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 51, and the non-specific path flow down.

The center passage 79 guides a game ball entered from the center passage inlet 78a to a lower discharge port 79a, which will be described later.
The center passage 79 linearly extends in the up-down direction (vertical direction). A lower discharge port 79 a is provided at the lower end of the center passage 79 . The lower discharge port 79a is provided at a position below the roof member 81 and above a first starting port 51, which will be described later, and opens toward the front side. In particular, the lower discharge port 79a is provided directly above the first starting port 51 . As a result, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 79a is discharged to a position below the roof member 81 in the third path portion rc, especially a position right above the first starting port 51. At this time, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 79a can easily enter the first starting port 51.例文帳に追加That is, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 79a flows into a path (specific path) that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start port 51, and flows down the specific path.

The third path portion rc is provided with two upper left other winning openings 57a and 57b and two lower left other winning openings 57c and 57d. Each of the other prize winning openings 57a to 57d is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. Each of the other prize winning openings 57a to 57d is capable of entering game balls flowing down the third path portion rc (impossible to enter game balls flowing down the right path r2).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning slot switch 106 (see FIG. 5). The left winning port switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning ports 57a to 57b (the game ball entering the other winning ports 57a to 57d). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106 .

A roof member 81 is provided on the downstream side (below) of the upper discharge port 78b in the left path r1.
The roof member 81 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction. The lateral dimension of the roof member 81 is larger than the lateral dimension of the first start opening 51 . As a result, the opening of the first starting port 51 is hidden by the roof member 81 when viewed from above. In this embodiment, the lateral dimension of the roof member 81 is substantially the same as the lateral dimension of the upper discharge port 78b.
The upper surface of the roof member 81 is inclined (curved) so that the central portion in the left-right direction is high and each end portion in the left-right direction is low. As a result, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the roof member 81 rolls on the upper surface of the roof member 81 and falls downward from the left and right ends of the roof member 81 .

A first starting port 51 is provided on the downstream side (below) of the lower discharge port 79a in the left path r1. The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path r1 (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path r2).
Inside the first starting port 51, a special figure 1 starting port switch 101 (see FIG. 5) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

A deceleration pocket 42 is provided at the most upstream of the right path r2. The deceleration pocket 42 is a pocket that opens upward to the upper left, and a game ball can be entered at all times.
The board surface of the game board 11 is provided with a ball entrance 42a and an exit 42b. The ball entrance 42 a is provided inside the deceleration pocket 42 . The discharge port 42b is provided on the downstream side of the deceleration pocket 42. As shown in FIG. Further, on the back side of the board surface of the game board 11, there is provided a back passage (not shown) that connects the ball inlet 42a and the outlet 42b. The rear passage is formed in a substantially U-shaped tubular shape.
All the game balls hit on the right path r2 flow into the deceleration pocket 42. - 特許庁The game ball that has flowed into the deceleration pocket 42 collides with the peripheral wall of the deceleration pocket 42 to be decelerated, and then flows into the rear passage through the ball entrance 42a. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the back passage is discharged to the right path r2 through the discharge port 42b.
As a result, the game ball launched to the right path r2 can be made to flow down the right path r2 after weakening its momentum, and it is possible to prevent damage to the game board 11 due to collision of the game ball. .

A starting gate 41 is provided on the downstream side of the outlet 42b in the right path r2. The starting gate 41 is always formed so that game balls can pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path r2 (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path r1).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 5). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .

A right winning opening 59 is provided downstream of the starting gate 41 in the right path r2. The right other prize winning opening 59 is a ball entrance opened upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The right other prize winning port 59 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path r2 (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path r1).
A right prize winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the right other prize winning port 59 . The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other right winning opening 59 (entrance of a gaming ball into the other right winning opening 59). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105 .

A second starting port 52 is provided downstream of the other right prize winning port 59 in the right path r2. The second start port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second start port 52, and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second start port 52. A normal electric accessory (ordinary electric role) 52a that can be displaced between (easy) and (easy) is provided.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 5). In the second starting port 52, the normal electric role 52a is normally in a closed state, and it is impossible to enter the game ball. The object 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path r2 (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path r1).
Inside the second starting port 52, a special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 5) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 .

A first big winning device 55 is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 52 in the right path r2. The first big prize winning device 55 includes a first big prize opening 55a and a first special electric accessory (special electric role) 55b for opening and closing the first big prize winning opening 55a.
The first special electric accessory 55b is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 55a, and makes it possible to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 55a ( It is possible to displace to an open state to make it easy). The first special electric accessory 55b is opened and closed by a first special electric accessory solenoid 65a (see FIG. 5).
In the first big prize winning device 55, the first special electric accessory 55b is normally in a closed state, and it is impossible to enter the game ball into the first big prize winning port 55a. While the state is occurring, the first special electric accessory 55b is opened, and the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 55a. A game ball flowing down the right path r2 can enter the first big winning hole 55a (a game ball flowing down the left path r1 cannot enter).
A first count switch 103a (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the first big winning device 55 (first big winning opening 55a). The first count switch 103a is a game ball entered into the first big winning device 55 (first big winning port 55a) (entrance of a game ball into the first big winning device 55 (first big winning port 55a)) A detection signal is output to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the first count switch 103a.

A second big winning device 56 is provided downstream of the first big winning device 55 in the right path r2. The second big winning device 56 includes a second big winning opening 56a and a second special electric accessory (special electric role) 56b for opening and closing the second big winning opening 56a.
The second special electric accessory 56b is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 56a, and makes it possible to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 56a ( It is possible to displace to an open state to make it easy). The second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed by a second special electric accessory solenoid 65b (see FIG. 5).
In the second big winning device 56, the second special electric accessory 56b is normally in a closed state, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 56a. While the game state is occurring, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 56a. A game ball flowing down the right path r2 can enter the second big winning hole 56a (a game ball flowing down the left path r1 cannot enter).
A second count switch 103b (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a). The second count switch 103b is for a game ball entering the second big winning device 56 (second big winning port 56a) (entering the game ball into the second big winning device 56 (second big winning port 56a)) A detection signal is output to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the second count switch 103b.

In addition, in the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a), there are a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), a second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a), a distribution means 56c for distributing a game ball entered into one of the V area and the discharge area.
A V-region switch 110 (see FIG. 5) is arranged in the V-region. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). Triggered by the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V prize flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later.
The distribution means 56c distributes the game ball that entered the second big prize winning device 56 (second big prize winning port 56a) to the V region, and the second big winning device 56 (second big prize winning port 56a). ), and a non-V-passing state in which a game ball that has entered the area is distributed to the discharge area.
That is, when the sorting means 56c is displaced to the V passage state, all the game balls entering the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a) are sorted to the V region. As a result, it becomes impossible for the gaming ball that has entered the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a) to pass through the ejection area.
On the other hand, when the sorting means 56c is displaced to the non-V-passing state, all the game balls entering the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a) are sorted to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for a game ball entering the second big winning device 56 (second big winning opening 56a) to pass through the V area.
The distribution means 56c is displaced by a V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 5).
A game ball entering the second big winning device 56 (second big winning hole 56a) is first detected by the second count switch 103b, and then sorted by the sorting means 56c out of the V area and the discharge area. It is distributed to one area, and after passing through the area, is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110 .

At the most downstream of the game area 30, there is an out port for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning ports (entering ball ports) 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57d, 59 58 are provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. The discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is entered into any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57d, 59, or by passing through the out hole 58. It is discharged from region 30 and flows into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game balls entered into the respective winning openings (entrance openings) 51, 52, 55a, 56a, 57a to 57c, 59 are activated by the switches 101, 102, 103a, 103b, After being detected by 105, 106, 110, it is directed to the exhaust path. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 5). Out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball (game ball discharged from game area 30) passing through the discharge path. As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 (all game balls hit into the game area 30) are detected by the out switch 109. FIG.

The game board 11 is provided with a main display device 60 (see FIG. 5). The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
The main display device 60 displays various information about games. That is, the main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a general figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, and a general figure reservation display device , a round display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time reduction display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 reservation display device, LED27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 reservation display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure holding display device, the LED 31 constitutes a variable probability display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , the time when the stop display is started, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (specifically, "jackpot symbol"), or when the special figure 2 display device is stopped and displayed When the drawn second special symbol (stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (specifically, "big hit pattern" or "small hit pattern"), a game state advantageous to the player (specifically, a big hit game state or small hit game state) is generated.

The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols.
Then, when the normal pattern stopped and displayed on the general pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (specifically, "normal pattern per pattern"), a game state advantageous to the player (specifically, general pattern Win game state) is generated.

The special figure 1 pending display device displays information indicating the number of times (special figure 1 pending number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 game information) is suspended. .
The special figure 2 pending display device displays information indicating the number of times (special figure 2 pending number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 2 game information) is suspended. .
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings).
The round display device displays information indicating the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
Information indicating the path (left path r1 or right path r2) on which the game ball should be hit is displayed on the right-handed display device.
The time saving display device displays information indicating the current game state (time saving control being executed or stopped).
Here, the pachinko machine 1 does not have a probability variation function (a function of varying the probability of winning a special symbol lottery or a normal symbol lottery). As a result, the variable probability display device is not used and no information is displayed on the variable probability display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the front frame unit 4 is provided with one or more movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable units. Each movable body unit is a movable body for production.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decoration part 4b, the upper surface of the receiving plate unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 5) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a driving source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 24 is configured by a photosensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives the light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in accordance with the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projecting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the production control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the position detection sensor 24 to block light from entering the light receiving part. Thereby, when the production member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, as detection sensors, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (vibration detection signal) to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration (vibration of the game board 11) having a strength exceeding a predetermined threshold.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Regarding the flow of game balls launched into the game area 30)
Next, the flow of game balls launched into the game area 30 will be described.
When the player rotates the handle operation unit, a game ball is launched into the game area 30 via the launch path r3. At this time, the momentum (initial speed) of the game ball launched into the game area 30 changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation portion by the player. When the game ball hit into the game area 30 is weak, it flows into the left path r1 (specifically, the first path part ra), and when the momentum is strong, it flows into the right path r2. .
The game ball that has flowed into the first path portion ra flows into either the warp entrance 72 or the second path portion rb after passing through the first path portion ra. That is, at the timing when the warp feather accessory 73 is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the terminal end of the first path portion ra enters the warp entrance 72 . On the other hand, at the timing when the warp blade accessory 73 is closed, the game ball that reaches the end of the first path portion ra flows into the second path portion rb without entering the warp entrance 72. .
At this time, since a plurality of interference members p are provided in the first path portion ra, the time required for one game ball to reach the end portion of the first path portion ra after being hit into the game area 30 can be made irregular. As a result, it is possible to randomize the entry of game balls into the warp entrance 72 with respect to the warp blade accessories 73 that open and close regularly.

A game ball entering the warp entrance 72 passes through the warp path portion 71 and flows into the stage portion 76 . Also, the game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 76 swings on the bottom surface of the stage portion 76, and then flows into the receiving portion 78 via the discharge port 76a. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the receiving portion 78 is discharged again to the game area 30 (third path portion rc) through one of the upper discharge port 78b and the lower discharge port 79a. That is, at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is closed, the game ball that reaches the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 does not flow into the center passage 79 and is discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to a non-specific route. On the other hand, at the timing when the shutter accessory 80 is in the open state, the game ball that has reached the bottom surface of the receiving portion 78 flows into the center passage 79 through the center passage entrance 78a, and passes through the lower discharge port 79a through a specific path. is discharged to
At this time, the spiral path 75 constituting the warp path portion 71 is formed as a spirally extending ramp, a plurality of projecting portions f are provided in the left region of the stage portion 76, and the bottom surface of the stage portion 76 is inclined (curved), etc., to make the time required for one game ball to reach the bottom surface (shutter accessory 80) of the receiving part 78 after entering the warp entrance 72 irregular. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to irregularize (randomize) the entry of game balls into the center passage entrance 78a for the shutter accessory 80 that opens and closes regularly.

The game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b falls on the upper surface of the roof member 81, rolls on the upper surface of the roof member 81, and is discharged laterally of the first starting port 51 in the horizontal direction. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the upper discharge port 78b to enter the first starting port 51, and the probability of entering the first starting port 51 decreases.
On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 79a is discharged to a position directly above the first starting port 51. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge hole 79a can easily enter the first starting port 51, and the probability of entering the first starting port 51 increases.
On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the second path portion rb flows into the third path portion rc after passing through the second path portion rb. A game ball flowing down the third path portion rc is guided by a nail, a windmill, or the like, and enters one of the first start opening 51, the left and other winning openings 57a to 57d, and the out opening 58.
At this time, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has flowed into the third path portion rc from the second path portion rb to enter the first start port 51, and the probability of entering the first start port 51 is low. Become.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, among the game balls launched into the left path r1, the game balls that flow into the third path portion rc via the second path portion rb pass through the sorting device 70. A game ball flowing into the third path portion rc has a higher probability of entering the first starting port 51 .
In particular, among the game balls flowing into the third path portion rc via the sorting device 70, the game balls discharged from the lower discharge port 79a are more likely than the game balls discharged from the upper discharge port 78b. The probability of entering the first starting hole 51 is increased.
As a result, it is possible to change the probability that a game ball flowing down the left path r1 enters the first start hole 51 according to the path along which the game ball flows, thereby improving the game playability. Become.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the section from the starting end of the left path r1 to the warp entrance 72, the section from the warp entrance 72 to the lower discharge port 79a, the period from the lower discharge port 79a to the first starting port 51, In the above, as a member that interferes with the flowing game ball (a member that regulates the flowing down of the game ball), the interference state / interference state (regulation state / regulation state) with the game ball is adjusted (specifically, the angle is adjusted by deformation ) is not provided.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability of a game ball hit to the left path r1 entering the first start hole 51 fluctuates depending on the machine.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 8 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 200, an effect control board 300, a payout control board 400, and a power supply for supplying power to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. A plurality of control boards such as a board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340 are provided.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . As shown in FIG. 8, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 8, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates hexadecimal numbers).
The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
In the program area, a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test defined by the gaming machine regulations and a program (specifically, calculating the base ratio) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (program code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
In addition to the use area m1 and the non-use area m2, the ROM 220 also includes an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a setting value area, a gaming machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of

A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 stores the game information acquired triggered by the input of the detection signal from each of the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the special figure 2 starter switches 102a and 102b, and the gate switch 104 area (game information storage area, which will be described later).

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests stipulated by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of performance display device 206 .
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2.

In this embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-use area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. there is
Also, in the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area The data stored in M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed).
A game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. It includes a 3rd loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 10006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once at the clock frequency divided by 32). within range) to generate a reach group random number. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, the handle detection signal from the firing enable condition detector 422, and the like.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the first count switch 103a, a detection signal from the second count switch 103b, a detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, and a detection signal from the out switch 109. , the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 114 on the other side, and the like are input.
To the input port 3, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. are input. be.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level). "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and a launch enable signal for detecting launch conditions, which will be described later. A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a, and the drive of the second special electric accessory solenoid 65b. A control signal for control, a control signal for controlling the V-area solenoid 66, a control signal for controlling the drive of the warp blade solenoid 67, a control signal for controlling the drive of the shutter accessory solenoid 68, etc. do.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. , and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display portion, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display portion, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display portion, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

A game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the upper three-digit display section of the four-digit display section (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. While the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of four digits (specifically, the upper first digit indicates "E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured including an operation portion provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.
In the pachinko machine 1, a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206 are provided. Application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a sink driver 240 common to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 is provided. Grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, respectively. output port) is no longer necessary.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and the main control board 200 (CPU 210) can be used to control the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
CPU210, in the test signal output process (step S4-24) to be described later, to generate test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, etc.), the generated test signal , in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
Also, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the first count switch 103a, A detection signal from the second count switch 103b, a detection signal from the right winning slot switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and the test is performed. It is input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, each solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid 64, first special electric accessory solenoid 65a, second special electric accessory solenoid 65b, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 A control signal for controlling driving is input to each solenoid and is also input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 . Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (rental ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700 .
In addition, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from 200 and the CR connection signal input from CR unit 700, the game ball shooting operation by game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method for controlling the game ball shooting operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 6, the payout control board 400 includes a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions, which will be described later.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection section 421 , a firing condition detection section 422 and a firing condition detection section 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects a rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal (makes the operation detection signal high level or low level) according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the emission volume 411 .
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence or absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Quantity and to detect.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal while detecting a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops outputting the operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the operation detection signal low level) when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected.
In addition, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411) while detecting the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and generates a firing intensity signal. An intensity signal is output to firing control circuit 425 .

The firing enable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects establishment of the firing enable condition.
The firing enable condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a predetermined signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal, and an AND gate. and a transistor for switching output/stop of the steering wheel detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "fireable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among the plurality of conditions constituting the later-described firing condition.
The firing enable conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation part), and (2) a detection status of the touch sensor 412 (a player's handle and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button).
In this embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. and (3) that the firing stop switch 413 does not detect that the firing stop button has been pressed down, the firing enable condition is met. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the condition for enabling shooting is not satisfied.
Here, the firing enable conditions are (1) a condition based on the detection state of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection state of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection state of the touch sensor 412 (player and (3) the condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (the detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button) is not included. I don't mind.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. When both conditions of (1) and (2) are satisfied, the firing enable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the firing enable condition is not satisfied. I don't mind.

Specifically, the firing condition detection unit 422 detects an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413. Based on this, it detects whether or not the conditions for enabling the launch are met.
At this time, the firing enable condition detection unit 422 detects that the firing enable condition is established when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing enable condition is not detected.
The firing condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the firing condition, and sends the generated handle detection signal to the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 respectively. output (set the steering wheel detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detection unit 422 stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 (lowers the handle detection signal) when it does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied. level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal. be.
The "shooting condition" is a condition for executing shooting of a game ball (game ball shooting operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, (1) the firing enable condition is satisfied, (2) the firing enable signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is met when all the conditions of On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launch condition is not met.
The "fire permission signal" indicates that communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 when the playable state is set.
Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing permission signal is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423 during the period when the main control board 200 is powered on, regardless of the state of the gaming machine. do not have. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the firing permission signal However, it may be configured such that it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 .
When the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are in a communicable state (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the "CR connection signal" It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection section 423 .

Specifically, the firing condition detection section 423 detects a handle detection signal input from the firing condition detection section 422, a firing permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , to detect whether or not the launch condition is met.
At this time, the firing condition detector 423 detects that the firing condition is established when all of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one signal among the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing condition is not detected.
The firing condition detector 423 generates a firing signal while detecting that the firing condition is established, and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (making the firing signal high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detector 423 stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (makes the firing signal low level) when it does not detect that the firing condition is met.

The shooting control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the shooting intensity of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 and the shooting timing of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 . That is, the shooting control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generator outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the launch timing controller.
The firing timing control section generates a pulse signal for controlling firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating section, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving section. At this time, the launch timing control section generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls launched per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit activates the firing solenoid based on the firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, the pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and the firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. It controls the output of drive signals to 431 .
Specifically, when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detecting section 423, the firing solenoid driving section receives input from the operation detecting section 421 triggered by the pulse signal input from the firing timing control section. A drive signal (driving current) corresponding to the emission intensity signal is output to the emission solenoid 431 . As a result, the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the shot intensity signal input from the operation detection section 421 .
On the other hand, the firing solenoid drive section stops outputting the drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 when the firing signal is not input from the firing condition detection section 423 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball shooting device 430 includes a ball-striking mallet (not shown) and a shooting solenoid 431 for driving the ball-striking mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the ball hitting mallet may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feeding unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the shooting solenoid 431, the shooting solenoid 431 is driven according to the input drive signal, and a game ball is shot out by the ball hitting mallet. Thereby, the game ball is shot to the game area 30 via the shooting path r3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, on the premise that the main control board 200 is set to the playable state and the communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible, the shooting is stopped. When the handle operation unit is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by contact with the player without pressing the button, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is started. . During execution of the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430, the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section.
Further, when the shooting stop button is pressed, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. That is, even in a state where the handle operation portion is rotated by the player's contact, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the shooting stop button is pressed.
Further, when the handle operation portion is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation portion is not rotated), the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. In other words, even when the player is in contact with the handle operating portion, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the handle operating portion is returned to the initial position.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the ready-to-fire condition detector 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the ready-to-fire condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "ready-to-fire state"). be done.
In other words, a state in which a rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, a contact to the handle operation unit is detected, and a press operation of the firing stop button is not detected (fireable state) is occurring. Meanwhile, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the firing enable state is occurring, regardless of whether or not a firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). ), the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Also, as long as the firing ready state is occurring, regardless of whether the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 state, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
As described above, it becomes possible for the main control board 200 to detect (grasp) whether or not the ready-to-fire state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effects, etc. according to the state of occurrence of the ready-to-fire state. It becomes possible to

That is, when the main control board 200 detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from the state in which it is not input to the state in which it is input (the steering wheel detection signal has changed from low level to high level), it is possible to fire. A game situation designation command designating the occurrence (start) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300. - 特許庁
On the other hand, when the main control board 200 detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from being input to not being input (the steering wheel detection signal has changed from high level to low level), it is possible to fire. A game situation designation command designating release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state by receiving the game situation specifying command specifying the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state, and receives the game situation specifying command to specify the release of the ready-to-fire state It becomes possible to detect release of the ready-to-fire state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the content of the effect depending on whether or not the state of being ready to be fired is occurring.

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board.
The effect control board 300 controls effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
As shown in FIG. 7 , the effect control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301 .
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data necessary for executing the control program, and the like. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores (stores) effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, animation data corresponding to each display effect number, various compressed lamp drive data, and various compressed motor drive data.
"Compressed lamp driving data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp driving data in a predetermined format. "Lamp driving data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data designating luminance values of lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. "Motor driving data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data defining the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR flash memory (NOR ROM) is used as the control ROM 302 . Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
Control ROM 302 is connected to HOST interface 313 of microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (stores) various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image/still image) that serves as a material for drawing processing.
"Compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. The “sound data” is data of sounds (effect sounds) output from the various speakers 22 .
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND ROM) is used as the CGROM 303 . Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) using a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
CGROM 303 is connected to CG bus interface 314 of microcomputer 301 . The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard connection interface. As a result, various data stored in the CGROM 303 are read by SATA transfer.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a drawing command buffer area. In this embodiment, the drawing command buffer area adopts a double buffering method, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as the construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area. Designation of the construction area and designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each drawing command buffer area for each frame.
For each drawing command buffer area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in the drawing command buffer area during the period designated as the construction area, and during the period designated as the transfer area. , the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
DRAM 304 is connected to DRAM interface 315 of microcomputer 301 .

A microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls production operations by various production means based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
The "various effects means" include the main image display device 31, various speakers 22, various lamps 20 and 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "effect operations by various effect means" includes display of effect images by the main image display device 31, output of sound by various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of various lamps 20 and 21, various motors 23 (various movable body), etc.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphic It includes internal devices such as a sound decoder circuit 321 , a drawing circuit 322 and a sound circuit 323 , and these internal devices are connected to a data bus 324 .

The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312 . The HOST interface 313 is also connected to the main control board 200 and receives control commands from the main control board 200 . Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313 .
This allows the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a sound circuit 323 via the HOST interface 313 and data bus 324. .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313 .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 can execute data reading/writing with respect to the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various kinds of arithmetic processing required to control the performance operations by various kinds of performance means, control processing of internal devices according to the various kinds of arithmetic processing, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects/sets effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number. In addition, according to the selected/set production scenario data, instruction information (internal commands) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound circuit 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) is sequentially generated.

Specifically, CPU 310 sets the animation table in the animation table setting area according to the command information. Then, according to the set animation table, a display list is generated in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the display list describes drawing commands for one frame in a predetermined order. Then, in VDP, drawing data for one frame is generated by executing processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information specifying the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) at the time of drawing the image data, the The coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) for drawing the image data, the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data, etc. are specified.

Also, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when the power is turned on.
That is, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the sound circuit 323 executes the audio output process, the processing performance may drop significantly.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a memory means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303, before the audio output processing is executed. . By adopting a configuration in which compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when audio output processing is executed, deterioration in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . At this time, in this embodiment, all compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . Here, part of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 .
After the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the pachinko machine 1 enters a state in which it is possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the main image display device 31 is ready to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP). In other words, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image by the main image display device 31 (drawing processing by VDP) before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed.
On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving (emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor driving processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319 . The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322 .

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image expansion area. Image data (material data) developed (restored/decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image development area.
In addition, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and two frame buffer areas are provided in the VRAM 316 .
The two frame buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as the drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as the output area. Designation of the drawing area and designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame buffer area for each frame.
For each frame buffer area, drawing data for one frame is stored (generated and drawn) during the period designated as the drawing area, and during the period designated as the output area. , the video signal is output based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls display of effect images by the main image display device 31 . Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and outputs the generated video signal to the main image. Output to the display device 31 .
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the rendering process by the rendering circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes the drawing process, the processing performance may be significantly reduced.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed image data previously stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303, before the drawing process is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, the deterioration of the processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, the preloader circuit 319 loads one frame of compressed image data specified by the display list out of the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 into the preload area of the DRAM 304 . transfer (preload) to At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address designating the storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, the preloader circuit 319 loads the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command for each drawing command included in the display list into a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. , the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address designating the storage area (predetermined area of the DRAM 304) after the transfer. As a result, a new display list with rewritten image addresses is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . However, the preloader circuit 319 may transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316 .
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates/renders) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, the drawing circuit 320 reads from the DRAM 304 one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list. One frame of compressed image data read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded/decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316 . The rendering circuit 320 then uses the image data stored in the image rendering area to generate rendering data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the rendering area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on drawing data for one frame stored (generated and drawn) in the frame buffer area designated as the output area, and displays the generated video signal as the main image display. Output to device 31 . In this embodiment, digital RGB signals are output as video signals. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may be employed.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). ) etc.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.
The scaler circuit can apply scaling processing (enlargement processing/reduction processing) to the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit can apply color correction processing to the drawing data processed by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit can perform dithering processing on the drawing data processed by the color correction circuit.
The drawing data after processing by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
A synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronizing signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronizing signal and vertical synchronizing signal to the main image display device 31 . Also, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 .
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (the display of the effect image based on drawing data for one frame) on the main image display device 31 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronizing signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronizing signal to the CPU 310 (high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound circuit 323 (built-in sound source) controls output (playback) of sounds (effect sounds) from the various speakers 22 .
The sound circuit 323 includes 40 tracks (track 1 to track 40), 8 audio buses (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8), and 8 channels (channel 1 to channel 8). It is configured.
The sound circuit 323 has an independent sequencer for each track. In the sequencer, it is possible to register phrase information (information designating compressed audio data) to be reproduced for each track. The sequencer can control reproduction, stop, volume, etc. of audio data based on the registered phrase information for each track.
Each track has a compressed audio decoder that restores (decodes/decodes) compressed audio data, a track fader that controls the volume of the corresponding track, and a programmable pan that outputs the audio data of the corresponding track to an arbitrary audio bus. is composed of
The eight audio buses are equipped with a switcher, a ducker, a channel router for outputting audio data of each audio bus to an arbitrary channel, and the like.
The eight channels include channel volume, equalizer, limiter, post effector, master volume, audio serial output, and the like. Sound data output from each channel (audio serial output) is input to the speaker 22 via an amplifier (not shown). Here, one speaker 22 is connected to each channel.
CPU 310 registers phrase information to be reproduced in the sequencer according to the command information. As a result, audio data is generated according to the phrase information registered in the sequencer, and the generated audio data is output to various speakers 22 via amplifiers.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21. FIG.
Specifically, CPU 310 sets an LED register according to command information (message) set in a lamp command buffer area, which will be described later. Then, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data according to the setting of the LED register, and outputs the generated lamp drive data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 together with the clock signal. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The ramp controller 317a includes a ramp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads the compressed lamp drive data specified by the command information from the control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed lamp drive data. Then, it generates lamp driving data based on the restored lamp driving data, and outputs the generated lamp driving data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 .

The motor controller 317b controls driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, CPU 310 sets a motor register according to command information (message) set in a movable body command buffer area, which will be described later. Then, the motor controller 317b generates motor driving data according to the setting of the motor register, and outputs the generated motor driving data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads compression motor drive data specified by the command information from the control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. Then, based on the restored motor drive data, the motor drive data is generated, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343 .
Further, the motor controller 317b receives information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of the switches 25 to 29 from the sub-connection board 340, and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 are input.

(Control method of production by production control board 300)
Next, the control method of the production|presentation by the production|presentation control board 300 is demonstrated.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to the control command received from the main control board 200 . Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304 .
"Production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of production. Specifically, a plurality of pieces of process data are registered in chronological order in the production scenario data. That is, the production scenario data registers a plurality of process data and information designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data.
Each process data contains one or more command information. For example, as command information, command information specifying the start of a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) Command information specifying the end of (hereinafter referred to as "production end command") and the like are defined.

Also, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the production scenario timer set in the production scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and based on the updated production scenario timer value, the production set in the production scenario setting area. It is determined whether or not there is any process data whose start time has come among the process data registered in the scenario data. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information regarding the display effect (command information specifying the start of the display effect, command information specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information relating to the sound effect (command information specifying the start of the sound effect, command information specifying the end of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information relating to the lamp effect (command information specifying the start of the lamp effect, command information specifying the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information (command information specifying the start of the movable body presentation, command information specifying the end of the movable body presentation, etc.) regarding the movable body presentation is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Control method of display effects)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). An animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (images forming the display effect).
"Display priority information" is information that designates display priority.
"Display priority" is information that designates the priority order of display (drawing).
Then, when a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed overlapping in time, the display of the display screen 31a (the image displayed on the display screen 31a) is based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). effect image) is configured. In this case, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) constituting the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with respect to the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. , are displayed with priority. That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed.
In other words, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is closer to the player than the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. side). That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, the display effects (images) having higher display priority are displayed closer to the viewer.
As a result, of the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, a display effect (image) with a higher display priority and a display effect (image) with a lower display priority overlap. If there is, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, if the command information specifying the start of the display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information read out. Then, the read animation table is set (stored/registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated in the animation table setting area. A plurality of animation tables can be set in the animation table setting area.

The “animation table” is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that defines the progress of display effects (display of effect images) by the various image display devices 31 and 32 . In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of pieces of frame information are registered in chronological order in the animation table. Then, for the predetermined number of frame information registered in the animation table, the display effect progresses by sequentially executing the display of the image based on each frame information according to the registered order.
Each piece of frame information is various parameters for controlling (executing/configuring) display of an image for one frame. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display effect), the image Information that specifies the magnification (magnification/reduction) at the time of drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) for rendering the image data (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), etc. .

Then, CPU 310 controls display of effect images corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, CPU 310 executes a command construction process, which will be described later, at a predetermined cycle.
In the command building process, first, the sub-scenario timer corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area is updated. Next, based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area.
Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, among the frame information registered in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. A display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (display of the effect image by the main image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when one piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that designates rendering of image data designated by the one piece of animation data.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, it is specified that the image data specified by the plurality of animation data should be drawn in a predetermined order. A display list is constructed.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area, the order of executing the drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is set.

(Sound effect control method)
Next, a method of controlling sound effects by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
Here, the command information specifying the start of the sound effect includes information (sound effect number) specifying the compressed audio data to start playing, information specifying the track in which the compressed audio data is registered, and the like. . When the command information specifying the start of the sound effect is stored in the sound command buffer area, the command information specifies the information (sound effect number) specifying the compressed audio data specified by the command information. Register to the track to be played. Thus, the generation/output of audio data is controlled according to the information registered in each track.
On the other hand, the command information specifying the stop of the sound production includes information specifying the track whose reproduction is to be stopped. Then, when command information specifying the end of the sound effect is stored in the sound command buffer area, reproduction of the audio data is stopped for the track specified by the command information.
On the other hand, the command information for designating volume adjustment includes information for designating the track whose volume is to be adjusted, information for designating the content of adjustment, and the like. When command information designating volume adjustment is stored in the sound command buffer area, the volume of the track designated by the command information is adjusted in accordance with the adjustment content designated by the designation information.

(Lamp production control method)
Next, the control method of the lamp production by the production control board 300 will be described.
CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area. When it is determined that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the effect start command is read, and the read compressed lamp drive data is stored in the lamp register. set. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp effect (drive (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(Control method for movable body production)
Next, a method of controlling the movable object effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 determines whether command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the compression motor drive data specified by the effect start command is read, and the read compression motor drive data is set in the motor register. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the movable body effect (drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) according to the compression motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of Driver Board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp driving data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the board lamp 21 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups forming the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 generates an excitation signal (driving current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the game board unit 10 according to motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged on the game board unit 10 is specified in the motor drive data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Configuration of Sub Connection Board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting element groups constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 generates an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the front frame unit 4 is specified in the motor drive data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 and detection signals from various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 341 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (ordinary game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting change state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The set-verify state occurs when the set-verify condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information specifying the probability of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery/second special symbol lottery) (probability of winning a "jackpot"). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "jackpot" by a special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery/second special symbol lottery) fluctuates according to the value (set value) set in the set value area. (Change.
On the other hand, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery/second special symbol lottery) is fixed (constant) regardless of the value (set value) set in the set value area. It has become. That is, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery/second special symbol lottery) does not fluctuate (change) according to the value (set value) set in the set value area. .

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is opened, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined game state is occurring (specifically, while the time saving control is stopped).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30, the predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the first start hole 51, the second start hole 52, the right other winning hole 59, and It is information calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the left other prize winning openings 57a to 57d). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.
It should be noted that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52, the right other winning hole 59, and the left other winning holes 57a to 57d. Say the total.

(About time saving control)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 as compared to when the time saving control is stopped, which is advantageous to the player. In particular, during the execution of the time-saving control, compared to the stop of the time-saving control, as a result of easier entry of the game ball to the second start port 52, the condition for acquiring the special figure 2 game information Easier to establish.
Concretely, during execution of the time saving control, compared with the stop of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of normal symbols is shortened. Also, during the execution of the time-saving control, compared to when the time-saving control is stopped, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second start port 52 during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure, which will be described later (specifically In effect, the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state becomes longer, or the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened increases).
In addition, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (probability that "per normal pattern" is determined by the normal pattern winning determination) is fixed regardless of the game state. That is, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (probability of determining "normal pattern hit" by the normal pattern winning determination) is the same during the execution of the time saving control and during the stop of the time saving control.

(Normal design lottery)
Next, the normal symbol lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加
In this embodiment, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, "general pattern hit" and "loss" are defined.
The probability of being determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning) by normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning determination) is 99/100 regardless of whether the time saving control is being executed or stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of normal pattern per pattern) selected when "normal per pattern" is won by normal pattern lottery, "normal per pattern 1"("normal per pattern 1") is selected. ) is specified.
In the case of winning the "normal pattern 1", after the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the normal pattern display device, the stop pattern (normal pattern display mode) corresponding to the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is displayed. Stop is displayed.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "lost"), the normal symbol display device executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and then the stop symbol (display of the normal symbol) corresponding to the "lost symbol" mode) is stopped and displayed.
In this embodiment, when start determination is executed while the time saving control is stopped, 10.0 [s] is selected and set as the time (variation time) of the normal symbol variation display based on the start determination. On the other hand, when starting determination is performed during execution of time saving control, 1.0 [s] is selected and set as the time (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol variation display based on the starting determination.

When "normal pattern per 1" is won, the normal per pattern game state is generated after the end of the variable display and the stop display of normal patterns. And, in the normal per game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state.
Concretely, during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure, the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is executed based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Under the present circumstances, when starting determination is performed during stop of time saving control, opening-and-closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is performed based on a 1st normal electric opening-and-closing pattern. On the other hand, when the starting determination is performed during the execution of the time saving control, the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is performed based on the second normal electric opening/closing pattern.
In the first normal electric opening/closing pattern, 2 [times] is set as the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened (displaced from the closed state to the open state), and the duration of each opening (the open state is maintained As the time), the time (in this embodiment, 0.1 [s]) at which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 is set. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a based on the first normal opening/closing pattern is executed, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 occurs during the occurrence of the normal per game state. Impossible (difficult).

In the second normal switching pattern, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened (displaced from the closed state to the open state) is set to 2 [times], and the duration of each opening (the open state is maintained As the time), the time (in this embodiment, 2.9 [s]) at which it is possible (easy) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 is set. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a based on the second normal opening/closing pattern is executed, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is prevented during the occurrence of the normal per game state. It becomes possible (easily).
The opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a includes (1) the opening/closing control (opening/closing operation) of the normal electric accessory 52a based on a predetermined normal switching pattern (first normal switching pattern or second normal switching pattern). and (2) the number of game balls entered into the second starting port 52 during the opening/closing control reaches a predetermined upper limit number (1 [ball] in this embodiment). is terminated when the conditions of

(Special design lottery)
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the selection probabilities of the jackpot symbols. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing selection probabilities of small winning symbols.
In the pachinko machine 1, a first special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters a first starting port 51, and a second special symbol lottery occurs when a game ball enters a second starting port 52. A lottery is carried out.
In this embodiment, "big hit", "minor hit", and "loss" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. Also, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win", "minor win", and "lose" are defined.
In addition, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the configuration may be such that the "small hit" is not specified. Further, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, it may be configured such that "loss" is not specified.
In the following description, the probability of winning a "big hit" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is referred to as "big hit probability". Also, the probability of winning a "small hit" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is defined as "small hit probability".

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery are the same. In particular, the big hit probability of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is a probability corresponding to the value (set value) set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the jackpot probability corresponding to each setting value is, in order from the highest winning probability, the jackpot probability corresponding to the setting value = "5", the jackpot probability corresponding to the setting value = "4", and the setting value = Jackpot probability corresponding to "3", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "2", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "1", jackpot probability corresponding to set value = "0" (winning probability "high" → Winning probability is “low”).
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the set value=“0”, the jackpot probability=1/319.6. On the other hand, when the set value=“1”, the jackpot probability=1/291.2. On the other hand, when the set value=“2”, the jackpot probability=1/262.1. On the other hand, when the set value=“3”, the jackpot probability=1/242.7. On the other hand, when the set value=“4”, the jackpot probability=1/225.9. On the other hand, when the set value=“5”, the jackpot probability=1/204.8.

On the other hand, the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are different. At this time, the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery is higher than the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are respectively fixed (constant) regardless of the set value.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery is 1/362.0. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is 1/1.1.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the present embodiment, "jackpot 1"("jackpot1"(" Big hit pattern 1”) and “big hit pattern 2” (“big hit pattern 2”) are defined.
Then, in the case of winning the "jackpot" by the first special lottery, the probability that the "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is selected is 25 [%], and the "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2”) is selected is 75[%].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), "big hit 3"("big hit 3 ”) and “big hit 4” (“big hit pattern 4”) are defined.
Then, in the case of winning the "jackpot" by the second special pattern lottery, the probability that the "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is selected is set to 10[%], and the "jackpot 4"("jackpot pattern 4”) is selected is 90[%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), as the winning type (type of "small hit design") selected when the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, "small hit 1"(" A small hit pattern 1”) and a “small hit pattern 2” (“small hit pattern 2”) are defined.
Then, when the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the probability that the "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") is selected is 78[%], and the "small hit 2" ” (“small hit symbol 2”) is selected is 22[%].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), as the winning type (type of "small hit design") selected when the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, "small hit 3"(" A small hit pattern 3”) and a “small hit pattern 4” (“small hit pattern 4”) are defined.
Then, when the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that the "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") is selected is 10[%], and the "small win 4". The probability that (“small hit symbol 4”) is selected is set to 90[%].

When the "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 1" is stop-displayed after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special pattern 1 display device. be. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "REG symbol" are stop-displayed.
The "REG symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same even number such as "6, 6, 6". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 2" is stop-displayed after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special pattern 1 display device. be. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.
The "BIG symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same odd number such as "7, 7, 7". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.

When the "big hit 3" is won, after the variable display of the special design is executed in the special figure 2 display device, the stop design (display mode of the special design) corresponding to the "big hit design 3" is stop-displayed. be. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.
When the "jackpot 4" is won, the special pattern 2 display device executes the variable display of the special pattern, and then the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 4" is stop-displayed. be. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.

When the "small hit 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 1" is stopped after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special pattern 1 display device. Is displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "REG symbol" are stop-displayed.
When the "small hit 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 2" is stopped after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special pattern 1 display device. Is displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.

When the "small hit 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 3" is stopped after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special figure 2 display device. Is displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.
When the "small hit 4" is won, the stop pattern (display mode of the special pattern) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 4" is stopped after the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the special figure 2 display device. Is displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "BIG symbol" are stop-displayed.

In the case of losing the first special symbol lottery (in the case of "lost"), the special symbol 1 display device executes a variable display of the special symbol, and then the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" (special symbol display mode) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "lost symbol" are stop-displayed.
The "missing symbol" is, for example, among the first effect symbols z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, at least one first effect symbol z1 The second production pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color.
In the case of losing the second special symbol lottery (in the case of "lost"), after the special symbol variable display is performed on the special figure 2 display device, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" (special symbol display mode) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of the performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "lost symbol" are stop-displayed.

When "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") to "jackpot 4"("jackpot pattern 4") are won, the jackpot game state is generated after the variable display and stop display of the special patterns are executed. be. During the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the first special electric accessory 55b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 55a.
Specifically, a predetermined number of round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, when "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" are won, 5 [times] is set as the number of round games.
During the period from the start to the end of each round game, the open state (long open) of the first special electric accessory 55b is maintained at all times. That is, according to the start of each round game, the first special electric accessory 55b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and according to the end of the round game, the first special electric accessory 55b is closed from the open state. state is displaced.
When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" are won, a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the longest opening time of the first special electric accessory 55b in each round game. be.
In each round game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the first special electric accessory 55b was opened, and (2) during the execution of the round game, to the first big winning port 55a. When the number of game balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10 [balls] in this embodiment), the process ends when any one of the conditions is established.

When "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 4"("small win pattern 4") is won, after the special symbols are displayed in a variable and stopped manner, a small win A game state is generated. During the occurrence of the small winning game state, the second special electric accessory 56b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, allowing the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 56a.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the small winning game state, a predetermined number of small winning games are executed. In this embodiment, when "small win 1" to "small win 4" are won, 1 [time] is set as the number of small win games.
Then, during each small winning game, based on a predetermined distribution pattern, the distribution means 56c is displaced (displaced to V passing state or non-V passing state), and based on a predetermined opening and closing pattern, The opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed.
In this embodiment, one distribution pattern (hereinafter referred to as "specific distribution pattern") is defined as the distribution pattern of the distribution means 56c in the small winning game. Then, when "minor win 1" to "minor win 4" are won, the sorting means 56c is displaced according to the specific sorting pattern in each small win game.
In addition, one opening/closing pattern (hereinafter referred to as "specific opening/closing pattern") is defined as the opening/closing pattern of the second special electric accessory 56b in the small winning game. Then, when "small win 1" to "small win 4" are won, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed according to a specific opening/closing pattern in each small winning game.

In the specific opening/closing pattern, short opening of the second special electric accessory 56b is executed multiple times.
"Short opening" is opening according to the short opening time.
"Short opening time" is a time (for example, 0.1 to 0.5 [ s]).
That is, in the specific opening/closing pattern, a plurality of times (eg, 5 to 10 [times]) is set as the number of times the second special electric accessory 56b is short-opened (displaced from the closed state to the open state). In addition, a short-circuit release time is set as the duration of each short-circuit release (time during which the open state is maintained). Furthermore, after each short-circuit opening, the second special electric accessory 56b is kept closed (closed state) for a predetermined time.
In particular, in the specific opening/closing pattern, in relation to the specific allocation pattern, a game ball entered into the second big winning hole 56a during the small winning game can easily (possibly) pass through the V area (pattern). , short opening is performed multiple times. Thereby, when the opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b based on the specific opening/closing pattern is executed, it is easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area while the small winning game state is occurring. becomes.

Each round of the small winning game is (1) the completion of the opening/closing control (opening/closing operation) of the second special electric accessory 56b based on a predetermined opening/closing pattern (specific opening/closing pattern in this embodiment), and (2) Establishment of one of the conditions that the number of game balls entered into the second big winning hole 56a during execution of the small winning game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is terminated according to
When passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state (when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the second big winning hole 56a during execution of the small winning game is detected ), according to the end of the small-hit game state (following the small-hit game state), a big-hit game state is generated.
At this time, when "minor win 1" to "minor win 4" are won, 5 [times] is set as the number of round games.
As a result, when "minor win 1" to "minor win 4" are won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected while the minor win gaming state is occurring, the total number of rounds is 6 [times]. becomes.
Here, the "total number of rounds" is the total number of rounds (small winning game or round game) executed during occurrence of the small winning game state and occurrence of the big winning game state.
In addition, when "small win 1" to "small win 4" are won, the maximum opening time of the second special electric accessory 56b in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] ) is set.
On the other hand, when passage of the V area by the game ball is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring If not), after the end of the small winning game state (following the small winning game state), the big winning game state is not generated.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when "small winning pattern 1" to "small winning pattern 4" are won, the second special electric role product 56b is opened by a specific opening/closing pattern in each small winning game. Opened and closed. As a result, it is easy (possible) for all the “small winning symbols” (“small winning symbols 1” to “small winning symbols 4”) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area while the small winning game state is occurring. ) is a “small hit pattern”.
However, as the type of the small winning pattern, it is easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state (hereinafter referred to as "small winning (with V)"). and a type that makes it difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state (hereinafter referred to as “small winning (no V)”). I don't mind.
That is, the specific opening/closing pattern and the non-specific opening/closing pattern are defined as the opening/closing pattern of the second special electric accessory 56b in the small winning game.
In the non-specific opening/closing pattern, in relation to the specific allocation pattern, it is difficult (impossible) for a game ball entering the second big winning hole 56a during a small winning game to pass through the V area (pattern ) so that the short circuit is opened multiple times. As a result, when the opening/closing control of the second special electric accessory 56b based on the non-specific opening/closing pattern is executed, it is easy (possible ).
Then, when a "small win (with V)" is won, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed according to a specific opening/closing pattern in each small win game. As a result, when the "small win (with V)" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state.
On the other hand, when a "small win (no V)" is won, the second special electric accessory 56b is opened and closed by a non-specific opening/closing pattern in each small win game. As a result, when a "small hit (no V)" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state.

At the end of the jackpot game state, the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (running or stopping the time saving control) and the type of winning pattern ("big hit pattern 1" to "big hit pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1" ~ "small hit pattern 4") and, depending on the combination, a predetermined number of times of time reduction (first number of times of time reduction and second number of times of time reduction described later) is set.
In this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions (specifically, “time-saving end condition 1” to “time-saving end condition 3”) are defined as end conditions for time-saving control (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving end conditions”). It is

"Time saving end condition 1" is a time saving end condition based on the total number of the number of special figure 1 fluctuation games and the number of special figure 2 fluctuation games.
"Special figure 1 variation game" is a variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol according to the result of the start determination based on the special figure 1 game information). In addition, the "special figure 1 fluctuation game" may be used as the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol.
"Special figure 2 variation game" is a variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol according to the result of the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information). In addition, the "special figure 2 fluctuation game" may be used as the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol.
In this embodiment, the total number of special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game executed during time saving control (hereinafter referred to as "time saving special figure total fluctuation number") is set at the end of the jackpot game state By having reached the 1st time saving number of times, "time saving end condition 1" is established.
Then, when the "time saving end condition 1" is established, at the end of the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game) that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition, the time saving control is is terminated.
In other words, if the "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied, at the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (variation time Elapsed time), the time saving control is terminated.
The main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure total fluctuations. At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the CPU 210 uses the value of the first time saving counter as the value of the first time saving counter, the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (time saving control is being executed or stopped), and the winning symbol type (“jackpot symbol 1” to “ The first time-saving number is set according to the combination of "big hit pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1" to "small hit pattern 4"). Also, every time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. When the value of the first time saving counter is decremented to "0", the time saving control is stopped assuming that the "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied.

"Time saving end condition 2" is a time saving end condition based on the special figure 2 fluctuation game.
In this embodiment, the number of times of the special figure 2 fluctuation game executed during the time saving control (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times during time saving") is the second time saving number set at the end of the big hit game state By having reached, "the time saving end condition 2" is materialized.
Then, when the "time saving end condition 2" is established, the time saving control is ended at the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation game which is the opportunity for the time saving end condition to be established.
In other words, when the "time saving end condition 2" is established, at the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), the time saving control ends be done.
The main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure 2 fluctuations. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the second time-saving counter as the value of the second time-saving counter, the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (time-saving control is being executed or stopped), and the type of winning symbol ("big hit pattern 1" to " The second number of times of time reduction is set according to the combination of "big hit pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1" to "small hit pattern 4"). In addition, every time the variable display of the second special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. Then, when the value of the second time saving counter is decremented to "0", the time saving control is stopped assuming that the "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied.

"Time-saving end condition 3" is a time-saving end condition based on the occurrence (start) of the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, the occurrence (start) of the jackpot game state establishes the "time saving end condition 3".
Then, when the "time saving end condition 3" is established, at the end of the stop display of the "big hit pattern" (at the end of the stop time (determined time)), or at the end of the small hit game (small hit game state Only when passage of the V area by the game ball during the occurrence of is detected), the time saving control is terminated.

It should be noted that the time-saving end condition may include a condition (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving end condition 4") based on the number of times the "small hit" is won.
That is, when the number of times of winning the "small hit" during the time saving control reaches the third time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, the "time saving end condition 4" is established, and the time saving control is ended. It does not matter if the configuration is
For example, when the number of fluctuations of the time-saving medium and small hits reaches the third time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the 'time-saving end condition 3' is established and the time-saving control may be ended.
Here, the "time reduction medium and small hit fluctuation frequency" is the number of times of the small hit fluctuation game executed during the time saving control. "Small hit variation game" is a variation game (special figure 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation) that is executed when a "small hit" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) game).
With this configuration, when the "time saving end condition 4" is established, at the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol related to the "small hit" that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (when the fluctuation time has elapsed) , the time saving control is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of execution of start determination, the jackpot game state ends At times, 0 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 0 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of execution of start determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, as the first time saving number of times, 14 [times] is set, and 10 [times] is set as the second time saving frequency.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of execution of the start determination, the jackpot game state At the end of , 14 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 10 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 4"("jackpot pattern 4") is won, 0 [times] or 14 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, and 0 [times] or 10 [times] is set. At this time, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination is the normal state, 0 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 0 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination is the time saving state, 14 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 10 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(a), "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") is won, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In the case, regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of execution of the start determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, 0 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, and as the second time saving number of times, 0 [times] is set.
On the other hand, when "small hit 2"("small hit pattern 2") is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the game state at the time of execution of start determination Regardless of (normal state or time saving state), at the end of the jackpot game state, 14 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 10 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(b), "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") is won, and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In the case, regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) at the time of execution of the start determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, 14 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, and as the second time saving number of times, 10 [times] is set.
On the other hand, if the "small hit 4"("small hit pattern 4") is won and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the first time saving number of times is 0 [ times] or 14 [times] is set, and 0 [times] or 10 [times] is set as the second number of time reductions. At this time, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination is the normal state, 0 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 0 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination is the time saving state, 14 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, and 10 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving.
It should be noted that "small hit 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 4"("small win pattern 4") are won, and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win game state is occurring. is not detected, since the jackpot game state is not generated, the number of times of time saving (first number of times of time saving and second number of times of time saving) is not newly set. Therefore, the game state (and the number of time reductions) at the start of the small winning game state continues even after the small winning game state ends.

Then, at the end of the jackpot game state, when both the value of the first time saving counter (first time saving number of times) and the value of the second time saving counter (second time saving number of times) are set to 0 [times], After the end of the big hit game state, the time saving control is not executed. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the "normal state".
On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game state, at least one of the value of the first time saving counter (first time saving number of times) and the value of the second time saving counter (second time saving number of times) is set to a value of 1 [times] or more. When it is done, time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the "time saving state".
Time saving control ("time saving state") is started in response to the end of the big hit game state, (1) the time saving medium special figure total fluctuation number reached the first time saving number set at the end of the big hit game state ( "Time saving end condition 1"), (2) Time saving special figure 2 fluctuation number reached the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state ("Time saving end condition 2"), and (3) Out of the occurrence of the jackpot game state ("time saving end condition 3"), it is terminated according to the establishment of one of the time saving end conditions.

(Regarding the limiter function)
Next, the limiter function of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
A pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a limiter function.
"Limiter function" is a function to limit the number of consecutive times of control (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction giving control") in which the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is a time saving state. In other words, the limiter function is a function that limits the number of times that the time reduction grant control continues without sandwiching the control that makes the game state after the end of the jackpot game state a normal state (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction non-grant control"). It has become.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to perform time saving provision control continuously with 2 [time] as an upper limit by a limiter function.
Concretely, the main control board 200 is configured with a limiter counter that counts the number of continuous times of the time reduction imparting control. CPU210, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, depending on the combination of the game state and the winning symbol type at the time of execution of the start determination, as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter), a predetermined After setting the number of times of time saving (first number of times of time saving, second number of times of time saving), it is determined whether the count value of the limiter counter has reached a predetermined limit value (2 [times] in this embodiment).
Then, when it is determined that the count value of the limiter counter has reached the predetermined limit value, the limiter function is activated, and the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter/second time saving counter) is set to 0 [times ] is set, and the count value of the limiter counter is cleared (0 [times] is set as the count value of the limiter counter).
As a result, when the limiter function is activated, the game state after the big win game state ends becomes the normal state even though the condition for making the game state after the big win game state end the time saving state is satisfied. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the limiter counter has not reached the predetermined limit value, the limiter function is not operated, and the value set in each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter) maintain. Then, when at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to a value of 1 [times] or more (when performing time saving giving control), the count value of the limiter counter, Add 1 [times]. On the other hand, about both the 1st time saving counter and the 2nd time saving counter, when 0 [time] is set (when not performing time saving provision control), the count value of a limiter counter is not added.
Thus, when the limiter function does not operate, if the conditions for making the game state after the big win game state end the time saving state are satisfied, the game state after the big win game state ends becomes the time saving state and the big win game state ends. When the conditions for making the later game state into the time saving state are not satisfied, the game state after the big hit game state ends becomes the normal state.

(About the change in the reduction of working hours according to the setting value)
Next, a change in the reduction in working hours provision rate according to the set value will be described.
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing changes in the BIG bonus percentage according to set values.
In the pachinko machine 1, the total reduction in working hours provision rate fluctuates (changes) according to the value (set value) set in the set value area.
The "total short-time provision rate" is the short-time provision rate when either the "big win" or the "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the combined time reduction provision rate is the time reduction provision rate in the case of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total reduction of working hours grant rate is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding the time of "loss", through the time of "big hit" and "small hit" It is a short working hours grant rate.
The "time saving rate" is the winning type ("small hit"("small hit pattern") type / "big hit"("big hit pattern") type) that makes it possible (easy) to cause a time saving state. It is the probability of being elected. In other words, the time saving rate is the winning type (“small hit” (“small hit design”) type / “big hit” (“big hit design”) type) that makes it possible (easy) to start time saving control It is the probability of being elected to. Furthermore, in other words, the time reduction grant rate is the winning type (“small hit” (“small hit design”) type, “big hit” (“big hit design”) type that is supposed to give a time saving state (time reduction control) ) is the probability of winning.
In this embodiment, for the first special symbol lottery, the total time reduction grant rate (time reduction grant rate at the time of winning) fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, and for the second special symbol lottery, the total time reduction grant rate (winning Time reduction provision rate) is configured so that it does not fluctuate (change) according to the set value.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery fluctuates (changes) according to the set value. On the other hand, for the first special symbol lottery, each of the small hit probability, the big hit time reduction provision rate, and the small hit time reduction provision rate does not fluctuate (change) according to the set value. In particular, for the first special symbol lottery, the big hit reduction in working hours provision rate and the small hit reduction in working hours provision rate are different.
With this configuration, as a result of the jackpot probability fluctuating according to the set value for the first special symbol lottery, each of the combined winning probability and the combined short-time provision rate fluctuates (changes). That is, for the first special symbol lottery, as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, it is possible to fluctuate (change) each of the combined winning probability and the combined short-time provision rate.
The "big hit probability" is the probability of winning the "big hit" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).
The "small hit probability" is the probability of winning a "small hit" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).

The "big hit time reduction provision rate" is the time reduction provision rate when the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the time-saving grant rate at the time of the big hit is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding "loss" and "small hit", at the time of "big hit" It is a short-time grant rate.
The "small hit time reduction provision rate" is the time reduction provision rate when a "small hit" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the time-saving grant rate at the time of the small hit is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding "loss" and "big hit", when "small hit" It is a reduction in working hours grant rate.
The "total winning probability" is the probability of winning either "big win" or "small win" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the combined winning probability is the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the combined winning probability is the probability of winning other results excluding "lost" (lost) among the results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). .

In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the larger the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the big hit time reduction provision rate is higher than the small winning time reduction provision rate of the special symbol lottery.
With this configuration, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability) in the first special symbol lottery, the higher the total reduction in working hours provision rate. In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total reduction in working hours provision rate.
A detailed description will be given below.

That is, regarding the first special symbol lottery, if the jackpot probability is "A", the small hit probability is "C", and the total winning probability is "E", the total winning probability "E" is calculated by the following (formula 1) be done.
E=A+C (Formula 1)
As shown in FIG. 9(a), in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery jackpot probability (A) varies within the range of 1/319.9 to 1/204.8 depending on the set value. (Change. On the other hand, the small hit probability (C) of the first special symbol lottery is fixed at 1/362.0 regardless of the set value.
Then, when the set value = "0", the combined winning probability of the first special symbol lottery (E) = (1/319.6) + (1/362.0) = 1/169.7 .
On the other hand, when the set value=“1”, the combined winning probability of the first special symbol lottery (E)=(1/291.2)+(1/362.0)=1/161.4.
On the other hand, in the case of the set value = "2", the combined winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/262.1) + (1/362.0) = 1/152.0.
On the other hand, when the set value=“3”, the combined winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery is (1/242.7)+(1/362.0)=1/145.3.
On the other hand, in the case of the set value = "4", the combined winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/225.9) + (1/362.0) = 1/139.1.
On the other hand, when the set value=“5”, the combined winning probability (E) of the first special symbol lottery is (1/204.8)+(1/362.0)=1/130.8.
In this way, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the combined winning probability (E). In other words, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the combined winning probability (E).

In addition, for the first special symbol lottery, the reciprocal of the jackpot probability is "a", the jackpot time reduction rate is "B", the small hit probability is "c", the small hit time reduction rate is "D", and synthetic Assuming that the time reduction provision rate is “F”, the synthetic time reduction provision rate “F” is calculated by the following (Equation 2).
F=(c/(a+c))×B+(a/(a+c))×D (Formula 2)
As shown in FIG. 10(a), when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery, among "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") and "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2"), Any winning type (type of "jackpot design") is selected. At this time, the "jackpot 1" is selected with a probability of 25[%], and the "jackpot 2" is selected with a probability of 75[%].
Here, when "jackpot 1" is won, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes the normal state regardless of the game state at the time of start determination. Therefore, "jackpot 1" is a winning type that makes it impossible (difficult) to cause a time saving state.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 2" is won, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time saving state regardless of the game state at the time of start determination. Therefore, the "jackpot 2" is a winning type that can (easily) cause a time-saving state.
As a result, the big hit time reduction provision rate (B) of the first special symbol lottery is 75/100 (75 [%]) regardless of the set value. In particular, in the present embodiment, when a "jackpot" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the probability that the time saving state is given is higher than the probability that the time saving state is not given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when the "small hit" is won by the first special pattern lottery, "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") and "big hit 2"("big hit pattern 2 ”), one of the winning types (“small winning pattern” type) is selected. At this time, "small win 1" is selected with a probability of 78[%], and "small win 2" is selected with a probability of 22[%].
Here, the "small hit 1" is a winning type that makes it easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. Then, when the "small win 1" is won and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win game state is occurring, regardless of the game state at the time of the start determination, after the big win game state is completed. The game state becomes the normal state. Therefore, "small hit 1" is a winning type that makes it impossible (difficult) to cause a time saving state.
On the other hand, the "small win 2" is a winning type that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. Then, when the "small win 2" is won and the game ball passes through the V area while the small win game state is occurring, regardless of the game state at the time of the start determination, after the big win game state is finished. The game state becomes a time saving state. Therefore, the "small hit 2" is a winning type that can (easily) cause a time saving state.
As a result, the small hit time reduction provision rate (D) of the first special symbol lottery is 22/100 (22 [%]) regardless of the set value. In particular, in this embodiment, when a "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the probability that the time saving state is not given is higher than the probability that the time saving state is given.

As a result, when the setting value = "0", the synthetic time reduction rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (319.6 + 362.0)) × (75/100) + (319.6 /(319.6+362.0))×(22/100)=50.1[%].
On the other hand, when the setting value = "1", the synthetic time reduction rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (291.2 + 362.0)) × (75 / 100) + (291.2 / (291.2+362.0))×(22/100)=51.4[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "2", the synthetic time reduction rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (262.1 + 362.0)) × (75 / 100) + (262.1 / (262.1+362.0))×(22/100)=52.7[%].
On the other hand, when the setting value = "3", the synthetic time saving rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (242.7 + 362.0)) × (75 / 100) + (242.7 / (242.7+362.0))×(22/100)=53.7[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "4", the synthetic time reduction rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (225.9 + 362.0)) × (75 / 100) + (225.9 / (225.9+362.0))×(22/100)=54.6[%].
On the other hand, if the setting value = "5", the synthetic time reduction rate of the first special symbol lottery (F) = (362.0 / (204.8 + 362.0)) × (75 / 100) + (204.8 / (204.8+362.0))×(22/100)=55.9[%].
Thus, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total reduction in working hours provision rate (F). In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the combined time reduction provision rate (F).
Therefore, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the higher the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the degree of expectation (expected value/possibility) of giving the time saving state at the time of winning. In other words, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the degree of expectation (expected value/possibility) of giving the time-saving state at the time of winning.
In particular, in the present embodiment, for the first special symbol lottery, the small hit time reduction grant rate is less than 50 [%] (specifically, 22 [%]) Despite being set as a set value , Even if any value is set among "0" to "5", the total reduction in working hours provision rate is 50 [%] or more (especially, it exceeds 50 [%]). It's becoming

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the BIG bonus probability, the REG bonus probability, the combined bonus probability, and the BIG bonus ratio are each changed as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value for the first special symbol lottery. can be varied (changed).
In particular, as shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 1, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the greater the set value for the first special symbol lottery, the greater the BIG bonus probability, the REG bonus probability, the total bonus probability, and the Each of the BIG bonus percentages can be increased. In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the BIG bonus probability, the REG bonus probability, the combined bonus probability, and the BIG bonus ratio. It becomes possible.

"BIG bonus" is a winning type (" Among the types of "big hit" ("big hit pattern") and "small hit" ("small hit pattern") type), it is a winning type that makes it possible (easy) to cause a time-saving state. In other words, the "BIG bonus" is a winning that is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big win" or "small win") Of the types (“big hit” (“big hit pattern”) type / “small hit” (“small hit pattern”) type), it is possible (easy) to start time-saving control. . In other words, the "BIG bonus" is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big win" or "small win"). Among the winning types (types of "big hit" ("big hit pattern") and types of "small hit" ("small hit pattern")), it is a winning type that is supposed to give a time saving state (time saving control). there is

In this embodiment, among the winning types of the first special symbol lottery, "big hit 2"("big hit pattern 2") and "small hit 2"("small hit pattern 2") are "BIG bonuses".
"REG bonus" is a winning type (" Among the types of "big hit"("big hit pattern") and "small hit"("small hit pattern") type), it is a winning type that makes it impossible (difficult) to cause a time saving state. In other words, the "REG bonus" is a winning that is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big win" or "small win"). Of the types (“big hit” (“big hit pattern”) type / “small hit” (“small hit pattern”) type), it is impossible (difficult) to start time saving control. there is In other words, the "REG bonus" is selected when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (either "big win" or "small win"). Of the winning types (“big hit” (“big hit pattern”) type / “small hit” (“small hit pattern”) type), it is a winning type that is not expected to give a time saving state (time saving control). there is
In this embodiment, among the winning types of the first special symbol lottery, "big hit 1"("big hit pattern 1") and "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") are "REG bonuses".

The "BIG bonus probability" is the probability of winning the "BIG bonus" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the BIG bonus probability is " It is the probability of winning the BIG bonus.
The "REG bonus probability" is the probability of winning the "REG bonus" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the REG bonus probability is " REG bonus” is the probability of winning.
The "total bonus probability" is the probability of winning either the "BIG bonus" or the "REG bonus" by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the combined bonus probability is the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the total bonus probability is the probability of winning other results (bonuses) excluding "lost" (lost) among the results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). It's becoming Here, the combined bonus probability is the same as the above combined winning probability.
"BIG bonus ratio" is the probability that "BIG bonus" is selected when either "big hit" or "small hit" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). (percentage). In other words, the BIG bonus ratio is the probability (percentage) of selecting the "BIG bonus" when winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). In other words, the BIG bonus ratio is the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), excluding the time of "loss", the time of "big hit" and the time of "small hit". This is the probability (ratio) of selecting the "BIG bonus". Here, the BIG bonus rate is the same as the synthetic time reduction rate described above.
A detailed description will be given below.

That is, for the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot probability is "A", the jackpot time reduction rate is "B", the small hit probability is "C", the small hit time reduction rate is "D", and the BIG bonus probability is " G”, the BIG bonus probability “G” is calculated by the following (Equation 3).
G=(A×B)+(C×D) (Formula 3)
Then, when the setting value = "0", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/319.6) x (75/100) + (1/362.0) x ( 22/100)=1/338.6.
On the other hand, if the set value = "1", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/291.2) × (75/100) + (1/362.0) × (22/100 )=1/314.2.
On the other hand, if the set value = "2", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/262.1) × (75/100) + (1/362.0) × (22/100 )=1/288.3.
On the other hand, if the set value = "3", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/242.7) × (75/100) + (1/362.0) × (22/100 )=1/270.5.
On the other hand, if the set value = "4", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/225.9) × (75/100) + (1/362.0) × (22/100 )=1/254.7.
On the other hand, if the set value = "5", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus probability (G) = (1/204.8) × (75/100) + (1/362.0) × (22/100 )=1/234.2.
Thus, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the BIG bonus probability (G). In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the BIG bonus probability (G).

In addition, regarding the first special symbol lottery, the probability of a big hit is "A", the time reduction rate of a big hit is "B", the probability of a small hit is "C", the time reduction rate of a small hit is "D", and the REG bonus probability is " H”, the REG bonus probability “H” is calculated by the following (Equation 4).
H = (A x (1-B)) + (C x (1-D)) (Formula 4)
When the set value = "0", the REG bonus probability (H) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/319.6) x (1-(75/100)) + (1/362. 0)×(1−(22/100))=1/340.6.
On the other hand, if the set value = "1", the first special symbol lottery REG bonus probability (H) = (1/291.2) × (1-(75/100)) + (1/362.0) × (1−(22/100))=1/331.9.
On the other hand, if the set value = "2", the first special symbol lottery REG bonus probability (H) = (1/262.1) × (1-(75/100)) + (1/362.0) × (1−(22/100))=1/321.8.
On the other hand, if the set value = "3", the first special symbol lottery REG bonus probability (H) = (1/242.7) × (1-(75/100)) + (1/362.0) × (1-(22/100))=1/314.1.
On the other hand, if the set value = "4", the first special symbol lottery REG bonus probability (H) = (1/225.9) × (1-(75/100)) + (1/362.0) × (1−(22/100))=1/306.7.
On the other hand, if the set value = "5", the first special symbol lottery REG bonus probability (H) = (1/204.8) × (1-(75/100)) + (1/362.0) × (1−(22/100))=1/296.3.
In this way, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the REG bonus probability (H). In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the REG bonus probability (H).

Also, the total bonus probability is calculated in the same manner as the above total winning probability.
That is, regarding the first special symbol lottery, if the big hit probability is "A", the small hit probability is "C", and the total bonus probability is "I", the total bonus probability "I" is calculated by the following (Equation 5). be done.
I=A+C (Formula 5)
If the set value = "0", the total bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery = (1/319.6) + (1/362.0) = 1/169.7. .
On the other hand, when the set value=“1”, the combined bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery=(1/291.2)+(1/362.0)=1/161.4.
On the other hand, when the set value=“2”, the combined bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery=(1/262.1)+(1/362.0)=1/152.0.
On the other hand, when the set value=“3”, the combined bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery=(1/242.7)+(1/362.0)=1/145.3.
On the other hand, when the set value=“4”, the combined bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery=(1/225.9)+(1/362.0)=1/139.1.
On the other hand, when the set value=“1”, the combined bonus probability (I) of the first special symbol lottery=(1/204.8)+(1/362.0)=1/130.8.
In this way, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the combined bonus probability (I). In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the combined bonus probability (I).

In addition, the BIG bonus rate is calculated in the same manner as the synthetic short-time provision rate described above.
That is, for the first special symbol lottery, the reciprocal of the big hit probability is "a", the big hit time saving rate is "B", the small hit probability is the reciprocal "c", the small hit time saving rate is "D", BIG Assuming that the bonus percentage is "J", the BIG bonus percentage "J" is calculated by the following (Equation 6).
J=(c/(a+c))×B+(a/(a+c))×D (Formula 6)
Then, when the setting value = "0", the BIG bonus ratio (J) of the first special symbol lottery = (362.0/(319.6+362.0)) x (75/100) + (319. 6/(319.6+362.0))×(22/100)=50.1[%].
On the other hand, if the set value = "1", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus ratio (J) = (362.0/(291.2+362.0)) × (75/100) + (291.2/( 291.2+362.0))×(22/100)=51.4[%].
On the other hand, when the set value = "2", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus ratio (J) = (362.0/(262.1+362.0)) x (75/100) + (262.1/( 262.1+362.0))×(22/100)=52.7[%].
On the other hand, if the set value = "3", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus ratio (J) = (362.0/(242.7+362.0)) × (75/100) + (242.7/( 242.7+362.0))×(22/100)=53.7[%].
On the other hand, if the set value = "4", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus ratio (J) = (362.0 / (225.9 + 362.0)) × (75/100) + (225.9 / ( 225.9+362.0))×(22/100)=54.6[%].
On the other hand, if the set value = "5", the first special symbol lottery BIG bonus ratio (J) = (362.0/(204.8+362.0)) × (75/100) + (204.8/( 204.8+362.0))×(22/100)=55.9[%].
Thus, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the BIG bonus ratio (J). In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the BIG bonus ratio (J).

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery fluctuates (changes) according to the set value. On the other hand, for the second special symbol lottery, each of the small hit probability, the big hit time reduction provision rate, and the small hit time reduction provision rate does not fluctuate (change) according to the set value. In particular, for the second special symbol lottery, the big hit time reduction provision rate and the small hit time reduction provision rate are the same (except when the limiter function is activated).
With such a configuration, even if the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value for the second special symbol lottery, there is no fluctuation (change) in the combined time reduction provision rate.
Further, regarding the second special symbol lottery, even if the big hit probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, the BIG bonus ratio does not fluctuate (change) accordingly.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, for the first special symbol lottery, the total time reduction grant rate (time reduction grant rate at the time of winning) fluctuates (changes) according to the set value, and for the second special symbol lottery, the total time reduction grant The rate (shortening of working hours grant rate at the time of winning) can be configured not to fluctuate (change) according to the set value.

Here, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the larger the set value for the first special symbol lottery, the higher the probability of the big hit, the shorter the time given to the big hit than the small hit time reduction rate of the special symbol lottery. ratio is assumed to be higher. As a result, for the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the higher the total reduction in working hours provision rate. In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the lower the total reduction in working hours provision rate.
However, regarding the first special symbol lottery, on the premise that the larger the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, the larger the big hit time reduction grant rate than the small hit time reduction grant rate of the special symbol lottery. Any configuration is acceptable. As a result, in the first special symbol lottery, the larger the set value (the higher the jackpot probability), the lower the total reduction in working hours provision rate. In other words, for the first special symbol lottery, the smaller the set value (the lower the jackpot probability), the higher the total reduction in working hours provision rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the set value for the first special symbol lottery, even if any value of "0" to "5" is set, the total time reduction provision rate is 50 [ %] or more (in particular, it exceeds 50 [%]).
However, for the first special symbol lottery, as the setting value, at least the upper limit value (the value at which the jackpot winning probability is the upper limit) is set from "0" to "5", the total time reduction grant rate , 50 [%] or more (or exceeds 50 [%]), and at least when the lower limit (value at which the jackpot winning probability is the lower limit) is set, the total time reduction grant rate is 50 [%] A configuration of less than

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for the second special symbol lottery, the big hit time reduction provision rate and the small hit time reduction provision rate are the same (except when the limiter function is activated). As a result, even if the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value for the second special symbol lottery, the combined time reduction provision rate does not fluctuate (change) accordingly.
However, for the second special symbol lottery, the big hit reduction in working hours provision rate and the small hit reduction in working hours provision rate may be different. As a result, in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to have a configuration in which the total time reduction provision rate fluctuates (changes) as the jackpot probability fluctuates (changes) according to the set value.
For example, regarding the second special symbol lottery, when the limiter function is not in operation, the big hit time reduction grant rate and the small hit time reduction grant rate are the same, and when the limiter function is activated, the big hit time reduction grant rate and the small hit time reduction grant rate. It does not matter if the provision rate is different. With this configuration, for the second special symbol lottery, the total time reduction grant rate when the limiter function is not in operation does not fluctuate (change) according to the set value (jackpot probability), and the total time reduction grant rate when the limiter function is activated. However, it is possible to have a configuration that fluctuates (changes) according to the set value (jackpot probability).

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the transition of game states.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to acquire the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery (acquire the special figure 1 game information) by entering the game ball into the first start hole 51 arranged on the left path r1. It's becoming In addition, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 52 arranged on the right path r2, it is possible to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery (obtain the special figure 2 game information). .
When a "big win" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a big win game state is generated. In addition, when a "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), and passage of the V area by the game ball during the occurrence of the small win game state is detected, A jackpot gaming state is generated.
Then, the player can win many prize balls by entering the game ball into the first big winning hole 55a during the occurrence of the big win game state. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of generating more jackpot game states.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the combined winning probability is higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. In particular, the combined winning probability of the second special symbol lottery is very high.
As a result, the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to generate a big win game state than the first special symbol lottery.
Therefore, execution of the second special symbol lottery is easier than execution of the first special symbol lottery to cause a big win game state, which is advantageous to the player.
Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of acquiring more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery.
However, in order to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal symbol lottery, and enter the game ball into the second start port 52 while the normal symbol lottery game state is occurring. I need to ball.
Here, the probability of winning "per normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery is constant (99/100) regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state). On the other hand, the degree of difficulty (easy/difficult) of causing the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 during the occurrence of the per normal game state changes according to the game state (normal state or time saving state). .

That is, in the case of winning the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern game state. Based on the difficult (impossible) opening/closing pattern (specifically, the first normal opening/closing pattern), the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 52a is executed.
As a result, it becomes difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 even if the normal symbol lottery is won during the occurrence of the normal state, and as a result, the second special symbol lottery is performed. Opportunities become difficult (impossible) to seize.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the normal state, the chance of the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 in order to shift the game state to the time saving state by causing the jackpot game state. Aiming to acquire , a game ball is launched to the left path r1. Therefore, during the occurrence of the normal state, mainly the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the game progresses.
On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern game state. Based on the easy (possible) opening/closing pattern (specifically, the second normal/universal electric opening/closing pattern), the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is executed.
As a result, it becomes easy (possible) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 when winning the normal symbol lottery during the occurrence of the time saving state, and as a result, an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. It becomes easy (possible) to acquire
Therefore, during the occurrence of the time saving state, in order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52, the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball A game ball is launched to the right path r2 with the aim of capturing an opportunity. Therefore, during the occurrence of the time saving state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 fluctuation game.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the "REG bonus" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes the normal state again. As a result, when the "REG bonus" is won by the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to acquire only the prize balls based on the "REG bonus".
On the other hand, when a ``BIG bonus'' (hereinafter referred to as ``first win'') is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time saving state. As a result, when the "BIG bonus" is won by the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to obtain at least the prize balls based on the initial bonus set.
The initial bonus set consists of 4 [times] "bonuses"("BIGbonus" and "REG bonus").

That is, in the present embodiment, the total reduction in working hours provision rate is 100[%] for the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the reduction in working hours state. Moreover, by a limiter function, it is possible to perform time saving provision control continuously by setting 2 [times] as an upper limit. As a result, when the "first hit" is won, the game state after the jackpot game state ends for two [times] "bonuses" (hereinafter referred to as "limiter non-operating bonuses") including the "first hit" It becomes a time saving state, and it becomes easy to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. Then, at the end of the second (third time including the "first hit") "bonus" (hereinafter referred to as "limiter operation bonus") that occurs after the "first hit", the limiter function is activated and the limiter The game state after the end of the operating bonus becomes the normal state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, "1" is defined as the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the suspended second special symbol lottery after the end of the limiter operation bonus. At this time, since the combined winning probability of the second special symbol lottery is very high, a "bonus" (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reserved bonus") is obtained based on the second special symbol lottery that is reserved. becomes possible.

As a result, the first bonus set is 4 [times] "bonus" (2 [times] limiter non-activation bonus + 1 [times] limiter activation bonus + 1 [times] remaining pending bonus) = 4 [times] " Bonus”).
Here, the limiter non-operation bonus of each time becomes a "BIG bonus" in which the time reduction provision control is executed by the non-operation of the limiter function. On the other hand, a limiter operation|movement bonus turns into a "BIG bonus" by which time saving provision control is not performed by the operation|movement of a limiter function.
In addition, in the present embodiment, for the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the "BIG bonus" is won with a probability of 10 [%], and the "REG bonus" is won with a probability of 90 [%]. be elected. Therefore, the remaining pending bonus is "BIG bonus" with a probability of 10[%] and "REG bonus" with a probability of 90[%].
In particular, when the remaining reserved bonus that constitutes the initial bonus set is the "REG bonus", the series of bonus states ends when the remaining reserved bonus ends.
On the other hand, when the remaining reserved bonus that constitutes the first bonus set is the "BIG bonus", the gaming state after the remaining reserved bonus ends becomes the time saving state. As a result, following the initial bonus set, the continuation bonus set is executed, and prize balls based on the continuation bonus set can be obtained.

The continuation bonus set consists of 3 [times] "bonuses"("BIGbonus" and "REG bonus").
That is, if the remaining reserved bonus that constitutes the initial bonus set is a "BIG bonus", two [times] "bonuses" (limiter activation As for the bonus), the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a time-saving state, making it easy to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. Then, at the end of the second "bonus" (limiter operation bonus) that occurs after the remaining pending bonus (remaining pending bonus that constitutes the first bonus set), the limiter function is activated, and after the end of the limiter operation bonus The game state of becomes the normal state.
In addition, after the end of the limiter operation bonus (limiter operation bonus that constitutes the continuous bonus set), the second special symbol lottery that has been suspended is executed, and the "bonus" (remaining reserved bonus ) can be obtained.

From the above, the continuous bonus set is 3 [times] "bonus" (1 [times] limiter non-activation bonus + 1 [times] limiter activation bonus + 1 [times] remaining pending bonus) = 3 [times] " Bonus”).
Then, when the remaining reserved bonus that constitutes the continuous bonus set is the "REG bonus", the series of bonus states ends when the remaining reserved bonus ends.
On the other hand, if the remaining pending bonus that constitutes the continuous bonus set is a "BIG bonus", a new continuous bonus set is executed following the continuous bonus set, and prize balls based on the new bonus set are acquired. It becomes possible to

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of prize balls that can be obtained based on the bonus set can be increased by performing V avoidance shots during the bonus set (initial bonus set/continuous bonus set). It becomes possible.
"V avoidance hitting" is a game method of shooting a game ball so as to avoid the game ball from passing through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state.
That is, in this embodiment, the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is extremely high. As a result, the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set (initial bonus set/continuous bonus set) has a very high probability of winning a "small hit"("BIGbonus").
Further, in this embodiment, when the "BIG bonus" is won, the count value of the limiter counter is added at the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, even if a "small win"("BIGbonus") is won, if the game ball does not pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state, the count value of the limiter counter is added. never
Therefore, when the "small hit"("BIGbonus") is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set, by performing V avoidance hitting, the small winning game state (small winning game ), while avoiding addition of the count value of the limiter counter.
Here, in the present embodiment, 10 [times] is set as the second number of time reductions at the end of each limiter non-operation bonus. As a result, even if the jackpot game state is not generated after the end of each limiter non-operation bonus, the time saving state continues at least until the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 10 [times]. be done.
Then, in the bonus set, it is generated based on the second special symbol lottery of the predetermined times out of the 10 [times] second special symbol lottery executed after the end of each limiter non-operation bonus. As for the "small hit"("BIGbonus"), it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the bonus set by performing V avoidance shots.
At this time, the player arbitrarily determines the number of "small wins"("BIG" bonuses) for executing V avoidance shots. That is, in the present embodiment, although a very high probability is defined for the composite winning probability of the second special symbol lottery, it is not 100[%]. As a result, winning is not always guaranteed for the second special symbol lottery executed during the bonus set.
Therefore, a player who gives priority to increasing the number of winning balls acquired during the bonus set, among the "small hits"("BIGbonus") generated after each non-limiter bonus is completed, selects the V avoidance game. It increases the number of "small hits" to be executed.
On the other hand, the player who prioritizes avoiding the risk of ending the time saving state executes the V avoidance game among the "small hits"("BIGbonuses") that occur after the end of each limiter non-operation bonus. It will reduce the number of small hits.
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can change (increase or decrease) the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the bonus set according to whether or not the V avoidance shot is performed, thereby improving the game playability. becomes possible.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a normal pattern type designation command, and a normal pattern stop designation command. , game state designation command, hold number designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, V winning designation command, look-ahead designation command, error designation command, demo designation command, etc. there is

The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type (stop design number) of the stop design of the special design. Specifically, the symbol type designation command includes "losing symbol", "small winning symbol"("small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 4") and "big winning symbol"("big winning symbol 1" to "big winning symbol 4”), specify one type. The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, the symbol type specifying command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special symbol. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbols.
The stop designation command is a command for designating the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of stop display of special symbols.

The general pattern type designation command is a command for designating the type (stop design number) of the stop design of the normal design. Concretely, the general figure design classification specification command designates one classification among the "missing design" and "universal figure per design 1". The general pattern type designation command is normally transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display in the design.
Normal figure stop designation command is a command which designates the stop display of the normal design. The general pattern stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the normal pattern stop display.
The game state designation command is a command that designates a game state ("normal state" (time saving control is stopped) or "time saving state" (time saving control is being executed)). The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

The pending number designation command is a command for designating the pending number. In this embodiment, the pending number designation command designates that the pending number (Special Figure 1 pending number or Special Figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1", the pending number has decreased by "1", the pending number, etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device is reserved.
The pending number designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when game information is stored, when variable display of special symbols is started, and the like. In this embodiment, as the reserved number designation command, those corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state). The opening designation command designates the type of the small winning game state or the big winning game state (type of "small winning design" or "big winning design"). Specifically, the opening designation command designates one type of "small winning design 1" to "small winning design 4" and "big winning design 1" to "big winning design 4". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round (small winning game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating passage of the V area by the game ball. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The look-ahead designation command specifies the type of stop design (one of the types of "lost design", "small hit design 1" to "small hit design 4" and "big hit design 1" to "big hit design 4") is a command to In this embodiment, the look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. The error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a right-hand hitting error, and the like. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are respectively updated by the hard random number updating process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts CPU initialization processing shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.

In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the two read results. is occurring. Then, the determination result is stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read 2 [times], and based on the result of reading 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.

Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game ready state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that it is not turned on. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.
In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S1-16, subcommand transmission processing at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read/write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
At step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the game machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clearing subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clearing designation command) designating that RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the sub-command group includes a sub-command specifying the power recovery phase, a sub-command specifying the game state (game state offset value), a sub-command specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol. Subcommand to specify the stop pattern of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 includes a setting value designation command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-36) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (hitting pattern random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In other random number update processing, software random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 16 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off warning signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of RAM 230, a checksum is calculated. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 17 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In port input processing, the state of each switch sensor (each signal) is acquired.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input information storage area corresponding to the input port 204 (input and an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to input port 204) connected to port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is obtained, The acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch sensor, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. When the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. At this time, for each switch sensor, the ON state is determined based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine whether or not it has occurred.
The “on state” refers to a state in which a state (low level) in which no detection signal is input has changed to a state (high level) in which a detection signal is input.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the firing enable condition detection section 422 . In the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal of input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal. ) is done.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag obtained in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has been generated, and if it is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
At step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 (whether or not the ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 55b are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The normal game management process manages the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a. The normal game management process will be described later.
At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. The state management process monitors the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states). Then, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed at the time of detection of occurrence/cancellation of various errors. State management processing will be described later.

At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101, 102, 103a, 103b, 105, and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 storing the number of game balls entering the first starting port 51 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 52 are stored. a prize ball control counter 2 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first big prize hole 55a; and a prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the second big prize hole 56a. a prize ball control counter 4 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the left other prize winning openings 57a to 57d; and the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize winning opening 59 A winning ball control counter 6 is set.
In the winning opening switch process, it is determined whether or not the ON state is detected for the special figure 1 start opening switch 101, and if it is determined that the ON state is detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 1 do.
Also, for the special figure 2 starting port switch 102, it is determined whether or not the ON state is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state is detected, the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is added to "1".
Further, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the first count switch 103a is detected.
Further, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the second count switch 103b is detected.
Further, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected.
Further, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state is detected, the value of the winning ball control counter 6 is incremented by "1".

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 5 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 6 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when the state of designating the launch of the game ball to the left path r1 is changed to the state of designating the launch of the game ball to the right path r2 (at the start of the small winning game state) , at the start of a jackpot game state, etc.), set "1" in the shooting position specification flag area of the RAM 230, and send a sub-command specifying launching of the game ball to the right path r2 to the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230. memorize to As a result, a sub-command specifying launching of the game ball to the right path r2 is transmitted to the effect control board 300. FIG.
On the other hand, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path r2 to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path r1 (at the end of the time saving control, etc.), the launch position specification flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0".

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
"Symbol determination frequency information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination frequency information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the entrance openings (starting openings) 51 and 52 . The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101 and 102 is detected.
The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-out slot payout number information to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are "state before opening the first large winning opening", "control state for opening the first large winning opening", and "effective state for closing the first large winning opening". , ``waiting state for completion of opening the 1st big winning prize'', ``state before opening the 2nd big winning prize'', ``control state of opening the 2nd big winning prize'', It is determined whether or not the value designates one of the special game phases in the winning opening opening end wait state.
Then, the value set in the special game phase flag area is "pre-opening state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", "effective state of closing the first large winning opening", "first 1st Grand Prize Opening End Wait State, ``Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Open State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Control State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Enabled State'', and ``Second Grand Prize Opening Opened'' When it is determined that it is a value that specifies one of the special game phases in the "end wait state", the symbol information ("small winning symbol" or "big winning symbol") set in the fixed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 A value indicating the type) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained pattern information is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "pre-opening state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", "effective state of closing the first large winning opening", and "first large winning opening closed state". 1st big prize opening end wait state, 'state before opening 2nd big prize,''control state for opening 2nd big prize,''closed state of 2nd big prize,' and 'open of 2nd big prize. When it is determined that it is not a value specifying any of the special game phases in the end wait state, the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the big win game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big win game state). is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path r1 or right path r2) along which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, the output data g is not set.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of pending games is displayed, and the LED 32 displays the current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control).
In addition, as described above, the LED 31 is not used and information is not displayed by the LED 31 .

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character "-" is displayed, and the LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set values.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the setting stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "r.", and the LEDs 57 to 64 display the error A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66-68 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. FIG.
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66-68, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66-68 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, the test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time saving control execution state, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.

In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.
In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data is output to the output port 1 with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

Also, in the common output process, the output data of the launch permission signal is output to the output port 1 .
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the game ready state has occurred, it outputs to the output port 1 output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level. As a result, a launch enable signal is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to low level is output to the output port 1 . This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In the present embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined in the common output process that the playable state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while the game-enabled state is occurring (during setting). However, in the common output process, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the output of the launch permission signal may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the firing enable signal is always output while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output processing is processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter=“0”, the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired by the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. display data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set). If it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded) and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting value stored in the register is saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (it is in the OFF state), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
If the setting key switch 208 is turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is turned on. If the setting key switch 208 is not turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is turned on. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes setting value specification commands for specifying values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2, and the gate switch 104 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal chart starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected (Yes), step If the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V-region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.

In step S5-8, V passage detection processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period.
"V valid period" is from the start of the first round (small winning game) during the occurrence of the small winning game state until the valid time (interval time) for closing the big winning opening after the end of the first round has passed It is the period of
Then, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the V valid period, the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In this embodiment, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "first large winning opening open control state" or "first large winning opening closed valid state". If it is, it is determined that it is in the V winning valid period, and if it is a value corresponding to another special game phase, it is determined that it is not in the V winning valid period.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the normal pattern starting ball detection process.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.

In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
Here, in the present embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit value of the normal pattern reservation number (value of the normal pattern reservation number counter). However, in the configuration where the normal pattern hold is not set (during the normal game (during the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, during the stop display of the normal pattern, or during the occurrence of the normal pattern per game state), the normal pattern game information is acquired configuration) may be used. In addition, the upper limit of the number of general pattern reservations, between "1" to "4", may be changed as appropriate.
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing general pattern game information during execution of a game, and a general pattern game information storage area for storing general pattern game information for which normal pattern hit/loss determination is suspended. It is
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the general-purpose game information stored in the general-purpose game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority order.
In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area as the general pattern game information. At this time, the general pattern game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
In other words, if the current general pattern pending number counter value = "1", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "2", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "3", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "4", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit, and the special figure reservation number is not the upper limit If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the special figure reservation number is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5 -5, S5-7).
In this embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 reservation number. In addition, "1" is defined as the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reserved.
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number saving process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing special figure game information during execution of a game, a special figure 1 game information storage area for storing special figure 1 game information for which start determination is suspended, and a start determination for suspension. It is configured including a special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured including a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, for the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured including one storage area as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the memory area with the highest priority among the free memory areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the storage area of the information storage area.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", RAM 230 subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S5-5 and S5-7). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the prior determination process, first, the prior special figure per determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
Also, as a special figure big hit lottery table, a special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to each set value (“0” to “5”) is stored.
In addition, as a special figure small winning lottery table, a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information (first special symbol lottery) and a special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 game information (second special symbol lottery) A small winning lottery table and are stored.
In advance special figure hit determination processing, first, advance special figure big hit determination processing is executed.
In the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the setting value area is checked, and the special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special big win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "big win" is won (preliminary special big win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (special pattern lottery). The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, next, the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure small hit determination process, the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special figure small winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small winning determination). .
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small prize" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
A ROM 220 stores a jackpot pattern lottery table in which correspondences between jackpot pattern random numbers and types of ``jackpot patterns'' (``jackpot pattern 1'' to ``jackpot pattern 4'') are registered.
In addition, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information (first special symbol lottery), a jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information (second special symbol lottery), is stored.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "jackpot design", the reservation type of the game information to be determined in advance (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is confirmed, and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result read out. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
At this time, as described above, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, one of "big hit symbol 1" and "big hit symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, one of "big hit pattern 3" and "big hit pattern 4" is determined.

On the other hand, in the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
A ROM 220 stores a small winning pattern lottery table in which correspondences between winning pattern random numbers and types of "small winning patterns"("small winning patterns 1" to "small winning patterns 4") are registered.
In addition, as a small-hit design lottery table, a small-hit design lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information (first special design lottery) and a small-hit design lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information (second special design lottery) A table and a are stored.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small hit design", confirm the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the small hit design corresponding to the confirmation result Read the lottery table. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, one of "small hit symbol 1" and "small hit symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, one of "big hit pattern 3" and "big hit pattern 4" is determined.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (defeated) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (preliminary special figure design determination).
In the advance determination process, next, a prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the look-ahead specification command setting process, a look-ahead specification command that specifies the type of the stop symbol determined by the preliminary special symbol determination is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") as "special symbol variation waiting state" , ``Special figure fluctuating state'', ``Special figure stop symbol display state'', ``First big prize opening pre-open state'', ``First big prize opening control state'', and ``First big prize opening Closing enabled state", "Waiting state for ending the opening of the first big prize winning opening", "State before opening the second big winning prize", "Controlled state for opening the second big winning prize", and "Closed the second big winning prize "Valid state" and "Wait state for ending the opening of the second big prize opening" are stipulated.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "pre-opening state of the first big winning opening", the processing before opening the first big winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and the value corresponds to the "control state of opening the first big winning opening". In this case, the first big winning opening opening control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening closing valid state", the first big winning opening closing effective process to be described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening end wait state", a first big winning opening ending waiting process to be described later is started, and corresponds to the "second big winning mouth opening pre-open state". If the value corresponds to the second big winning hole opening pre-processing described later, and if the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole opening control state", the second big winning hole opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning opening closing valid state", the second big winning opening closing valid process to be described later is started, and the "second big winning opening closing end wait state" is started. , a wait process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) , moves to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) In, when it moves to step S11-3 and determines that the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), it moves to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more.
Then, when the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is "1" or more, the value specifying the game based on the special figure 2 game information ("1" in this embodiment) as the special symbol discrimination flag set value Along with setting, subtract "1" from the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0"), special figure 1 game information as a special symbol discrimination flag set value A value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. A start determination is performed.

In step S11-4, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the pending number designation command setting process, the pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM230.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", a reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM230.
On the other hand, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag = "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230.

In step S11-5, a special pattern storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value=“1”, the storage contents of the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
On the other hand, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the contents stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

In step S11-6, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine state flag area (gaming machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the setting abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the obtained setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-7) is performed.

In step S11-7, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the setting value area is checked, and the special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined. It is judged as a "jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the special figure big hit determination process, the special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag set value is read. Then, whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure small win lottery table. To determine (special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, when the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the value of the small hit registered in the special small prize lottery table, the special symbol lottery is performed. The result is determined as a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special-picture jackpot lottery table, the "jackpot" is won. judge not.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Concretely, in the special figure design determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a "big hit" (election) by special figure hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
At this time, as described above, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, one of "big hit pattern 1" and "big hit pattern 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, one of "big hit pattern 3" and "big hit pattern 4" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined.
For this, the small winning design lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special design discrimination flag is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, one of the "small hit design 1" and "small hit design 2" is determined. .
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, one of the "small hit design 3" and the "small hit design 4" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
Next, the symbol information designating the type of the determined stop symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-9, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the special design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table for big wins corresponding to "big hits", a stop pattern number lottery table for small wins corresponding to "small wins", and a stop pattern number lottery table for losers corresponding to "losses". A pattern number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table, a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern (special figure 1 game information) and a jackpot time corresponding to the second special pattern (special figure 2 game information) A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a ``big hit'' (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the setting value of the special symbol determination flag is confirmed, and the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of the big hit corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big-hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of small hit is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-11, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure per determination is confirmed. And, if the result of the special figure hit determination is a loss ("missing"), a special figure variation determination process at the time of loss, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is winning ("big hit" or "small hit"), special figure variation mode determination processing at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, reach group determination is first performed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
In the reach group determination, first, the reservation type (type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations, and the game state ("normal state" or " Time saving state"), and read out the reach group determination table corresponding to this confirmation result.Here, the game state is the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" to "6 ”).
Then, the reach group type is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of losing, next, at the time of losing the variation mode determination is executed.
In the determination of the fluctuation mode at the time of failure, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table are judged.
The ROM 220 stores a variation mode determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) are registered.
Also, as the variation mode determination table, a losing variation mode determination table and a winning variation mode determination table are stored.
Further, as a change mode determination table at loss, a change mode determination table at loss corresponding to each reach group number (each type of reach group) is stored.
In addition, as a winning fluctuation mode determination table, the reservation type (type of game information stored in storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), type of stop design ("jackpot design 1" - "big hit pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1" - "small hit pattern 4") and game state ("normal state" or "time saving state"), corresponding to each combination of variation mode determination at winning table is stored.
In particular, in each variation mode determination table, each reach mode random number is associated with a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern determination table (information specifying a variation pattern determination table). . Thereby, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table.
In the determination of the fluctuation mode at the time of failure, first, the reach group number determined by the determination of the reach group is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode determination table at the time of failure corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the readout fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table , to determine.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of losing, next, at the time of losing the change pattern determination is executed.
In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat, the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type) is judged.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Also, as the variation pattern determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables with mutually different contents are stored.
In the determination of variation pattern at the time of failure, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the determination of the variation mode at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, first, variation mode determination at the time of winning is executed.
In the winning variation mode determination, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern table are determined.
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the type of reservation (the type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) and the type of stop design ("jackpot design 1" ~ "Big win pattern 4" or "Small win pattern 1" to "Small win pattern 4") and game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") are confirmed, and when winning corresponding to this confirmation result A variation mode determination table is read, and the game state is determined based on the values (“0” to “6”) set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table , to determine.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, variation pattern determination at the time of winning is executed.
In winning variation pattern determination, a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation pattern designation command specifying the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S12-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. The number cutting management process will be described later.

In step S12-3, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop time setting process, the special symbol stop time is set in the special game timer.
Specifically, in the special figure stop time setting process, it is determined whether or not the value set in the time saving final game flag area of the RAM 230 is "1". Then, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving final game flag area is "1", the special stop time is set in the special game timer. When it is determined that the value set in the time saving final game flag area is not "1" (is "0"), the normal stop time is set in the special game timer.
Thereby, when the stop display of the special symbol relating to the time saving final game is started, the special stop time (8.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time. On the other hand, when the stop display of special symbols other than the time-saving final game is started, the normal stop time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time.

In step S12-5, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 8, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S12-2 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S12-2, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that time-saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2, and time-saving control is being executed If it is determined that it is not (it is stopped) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-3).
Here, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0", It judges that it is not in time saving control.
In step S28-2, the first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In a 1st time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 1st time saving counter.

In step S28-3, it is determined whether the value of the first time saving counter after updating is "0" or less (whether "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied), and the first time saving counter after updating is determined. If it is determined that the value of is not "0" or less ("time saving end condition 1" is not satisfied) (No), the process moves to step S28-4, and the value of the first time saving counter after updating is " 0” or less (“time saving termination condition 1” is satisfied) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7.
In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", and if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1" (Yes), step S28- 5, when it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1" (the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0") (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process is performed. (Step S12-3).

In step S28-5, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In a 2nd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 2nd time saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether the value of the second time saving counter after updating is "0" or less (whether "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied), and the second time saving counter after updating is determined. If it is determined that the value of is less than or equal to "0" (the "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7, and the value of the second time saving counter after updating is "0 ("Time saving end condition 2" is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-3).
In step S28-7, time saving control stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In the time saving control stop process, "0" (a value corresponding to the stop of the time saving control) is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 . Moreover, "0" is set as a value of each time saving counter (1st time saving counter and 2nd time saving counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S28-8, a time saving final game flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the time saving final game flag setting process, “1” (value corresponding to the time saving final game) is set in the time saving final game flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S28-9, subcommand setting processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S12-3) is performed. In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special stoppage)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, a time saving final game flag cancellation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-3. In the time saving final game flag release process, "0" (value corresponding to the non-time saving final game) is set in the time saving final game flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is "big hit design"("big hit design 1" to "big hit design 4"), and it is determined that the type of the stop design is "big hit design". If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-9. Here, the type of the stopped symbol is determined based on the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area.
At step S13-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1" (the value corresponding to the time saving control being executed). Then, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is "1", the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter) is set to "0" , "0" (a value corresponding to the stop of the time saving control) is set in the time saving control flag area. By this, time saving control is stopped and a "normal state" is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is not "1" (is "0"), the process proceeds to the next process (step S13-5).

In step S13-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the first special electric role item 55b is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each special electric role control table contains an opening time, an effective time for closing the big winning slot, a closing time for the big winning slot, an ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and opening/closing corresponding to each round (round game). The number of times of switching, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a corresponding to each open/close switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is read, and the read special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230. set in the special electric role control table area. In addition, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot design" designated by the design information stored in the design information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, first, after the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area of the RAM 230 is set (saved) in the fixed pattern information storage area of the RAM 230, the pattern information storage area is cleared (initialized/initialized). value). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-9, it is determined whether or not the type of the stop design is "small winning design"("small winning design 1" to "small winning design 4"), and the type of the stopping design is "small winning design". If it is determined that (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-10, and if it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is not a "small hit symbol" (a "losing symbol") (No), step Go to S13-14. Here, the type of the stopped symbol is determined based on the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area.
In step S13-10, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the second special electric role item 56b is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table (for a small win) corresponding to each type of "small win symbol". In addition, each special electric role control table (for small wins) includes opening time, effective time for closing big winning mouth, closing time for big winning mouth, ending time, number of rounds (number of small winning games), and each round (small win). Hit game) corresponding to the number of opening and closing switching, control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the second special electric accessory solenoid 65b corresponding to each opening and closing switching, corresponding to each round (small winning game) Control data (solenoid control data and control time data) and the like for the V-region solenoid 66 are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table (for small winning) corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area is read, and the read special electric role is executed. A winning combination control table (for small winnings) is set in the special electric winning combination control table area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

In step S13-11, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-12, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the type of "small hit design" designated by the design information stored in the design information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, first, after the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area of the RAM 230 is set (saved) in the fixed pattern information storage area of the RAM 230, the pattern information storage area is cleared (initialized/initialized). value). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-14, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, the pattern information storage area of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialization/initial value setting). Next, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process of the first big winning hole.
When the first big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter. Also, "1" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric service open/close switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open/close switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read. . Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open control state" is set.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first big winning hole opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first big winning hole opening control process.
When the first big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the second special electric accessory 56b is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set by the special game timer. set to
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the first big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first big winning opening closing effective process.
When the first big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value for determination.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process moves to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process moves to step S17-11.

At step S17-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1". Then, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is "1", the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter) is set to "0" , "0" is set in the time saving control flag area. By this, time saving control is stopped and a "normal state" is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value set in the time saving control flag area is not "1" (is "0"), the process proceeds to the next process (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the first special electric role item 55b is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table (for big win) corresponding to each type of "small win symbol". Each special electric role control table (for big wins) has an opening time, an effective time for closing the big winning slot, a closing time for the big winning slot, an ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the first special electric accessory solenoid 65a corresponding to each open/close switching are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table (for big win) corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read special electric role control table (for big win) is read. is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S17-9, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening pre-open state" is set.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, an ending specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open end wait state" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the 1st big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening.
When the first big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S40-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter. Also, "1" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S40-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting processing, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing switching times for special electric power is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open/close switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read. . Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S40-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open control state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Control Processing)
Next, the second big winning opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the second big winning hole opening control process.
When the second big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S41-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S41-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the big winning hole opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the first special electric accessory 55b is controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set by the special game timer. set to
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the second big winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second big winning opening closing effective process.
When the second big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S42-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer. Also, "0" is set in the special electric operation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending specifying command setting process, an ending specifying command specifying the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open end wait state" is set.
At step S42-6, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the second big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S43-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, first, the type of stop pattern ("big hit pattern" or "small hit pattern") specified by the pattern information stored in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and the execution time of the start determination , and the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter and second time-saving counter) is set according to the confirmation result.
At this time, when the "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won by the start determination executed during the execution or stop of the time saving control, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "0" is set as the value of the two-hour short counter.
On the other hand, when "big hit 2"("big hit pattern 2") is won by the start determination executed during execution/stop of time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second "10" is set as the value of the time saving counter.
On the other hand, when "big hit 3"("big hit pattern 3") is won by the start determination executed during execution/stop of time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second "10" is set as the value of the time saving counter.
On the other hand, when "big hit 4"("big hit pattern 4") is won by the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter "0" is set as the value.
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 4"("jackpot pattern 4") is elected by the start determination executed during the execution of the time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter Set "10" as the value.
On the other hand, when the "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") is elected by the start determination executed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "0" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, when the "small hit 2"("small hit pattern 2") is elected by the start determination executed during the execution or stop of the time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "10" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, when the "small hit 3"("small hit pattern 3") is elected by the start determination executed while the time saving control is being executed or stopped, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, "10" is set as the value of the second time saving counter.
On the other hand, when "small hit 4"("small hit pattern 4") is won by the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "0" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving "0" is set as the value of the counter.
On the other hand, when "small hit 4"("small hit pattern 4") is won by the start determination executed during the execution of time saving control, "14" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving "10" is set as the value of the counter.
In the game state setting process, next, when at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to a value of "1" or more, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 do.
On the other hand, when "0" is set for both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, the state in which "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained.

In step S43-3, limiter management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. The limiter management process manages activation/non-activation of the limiter function.
Specifically, in the limiter management process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, first, the value of the limiter counter determines whether it has reached a predetermined limit value (in this embodiment, 2 [times]). judge. When it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has reached the predetermined limit value, a limiter activation process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S43-4).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has not reached the predetermined limit value, "1" is added to the value of the limiter counter, and the next process (step S43-4) is performed. In this case, the limiter operation time processing is not executed, and the value set in each time saving counter (first time saving counter/second time saving counter) and the value set in the time saving control flag area are maintained be done.
In limiter operation time processing, "0" is set as a value of each time saving counter (the 1st time saving counter and the 2nd time saving counter). Moreover, "0" is set to a time saving control flag area|region. Furthermore, the value of the limiter counter is cleared (initial value=“0” is set). By this, if processing at the time of limiter actuation is performed, time saving control will not be started though the conditions which start time saving control are fulfilled.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the value of the limiter counter is cleared (initial value = "0" is set) , the process proceeds to the next process (step S43-4). In this case, the value set in each time saving counter (first time saving counter/second time saving counter) and the value set in the time saving control flag area are maintained.
Then, after the end of the limiter management process, if "0" is set in the time saving control flag area, the time saving control is not started, if "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, time saving control is started.

In step S43-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, first, the fixed symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialization/initial value setting). Also, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Special electric service open/close switching process)
Next, the special electric service open/close switching process in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5 and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessories 55b and 56b to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is performed. Read data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . Thereby, based on the set solenoid data, the control of the special electric accessory solenoids 65a, 65b is started, and the special electric accessory 55b, 56b is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control time corresponding to the value of the special service opening/closing switching frequency counter is set. read out. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4) is performed. . In the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting State", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory opening state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State” and “normal figure electric accessory open end wait state” are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value, the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, "Before opening normal electric accessories state”, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the “normal electric accessary product opening control state”, the normal electric accessary product opening control process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric role product closed valid state", the normal electric role product closing valid process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric role product open end wait state" , The normal electric accessary product opening end wait process to be described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, normal figure fluctuation wait processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-15) do.
In step S20-2, normal figure pending number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Concretely, in the general pattern reservation number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the general pattern reservation number counter.
Next, shift the storage area where the normal game information is stored. Concretely, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the normal game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the normal game information storage area.

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal symbol lottery table in which the winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered.
Then, in the general pattern hit-lose determination process, the general pattern hit-lose determination is executed based on the hit random number included in the normal pattern game information stored in the storage area 0 and the general pattern hit-lose lottery table.
Concretely, when the value of the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the hit value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning). .
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "lost" (lost).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general pattern stop symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not "per general pattern" (election) is determined by the general pattern hit/loss determination.
Then, when "per normal pattern" (election) is determined by the normal pattern hit/loss determination, the type of "per normal pattern"("per pattern per normal pattern 1") is determined (per pattern per normal pattern is determined).
The ROM 220 stores a general pattern winning symbol lottery table in which correspondence between a winning symbol random number and a type of "general per symbol"("universal per symbol 1") is registered.
In the per-universal pattern determination, the per-universal pattern lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning pattern random number included in the normal pattern game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read normal pattern winning pattern lottery table, the type of the normal pattern winning pattern is determined.
On the other hand, when "lost" (lost) is determined by normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of stop design.
In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In the general pattern stop symbol determination process, next, a normal pattern type specification command that specifies the type of the determined stop symbol is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal pattern variation pattern determination table in which correspondence between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
In addition, as a general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to each game state ("normal state" and "time saving state") is stored.
In the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination, first, the game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") is confirmed, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Here, the gaming state is determined based on the value (“0” or “1”) set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number contained in the general pattern game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-5 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal map display device.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-15) is performed.
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop pattern number stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the general-purpose diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal-symbol display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal-symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer. In addition, the normal map stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stopped pattern is not the "normal per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, if it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric role control table corresponding to each combination of the game state (“normal state” or “time-saving state”) and the type of normal pattern per pattern (“normal per pattern 1”). It is
Each normal electric role control table contains normal electric role opening pre-opening time, normal electric role closing valid time, opening end waiting time, number of opening/closing switching times, control data of ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 corresponding to opening/closing switching each time (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.).
In the normal electric role control data setting process, the game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") and the type of the normal pattern per pattern determined in step S20-4 ("normal per pattern 1") are set. After confirmation, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the confirmation result is read, and the read normal electric service control table is set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230 . Here, the game state is determined based on the value (“0” or “1”) set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, next, the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time before the normal electric role opening is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later. Also, "1" is set in the normal electric operation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric open/close switching process.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No), , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the ordinary electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 46, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data designating de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric role closing valid time setting process, the ordinary electric role closing valid time is set in the ordinary game timer by referring to the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closed valid state" is set.

(Normal electric accessories closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the ordinary electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 47, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer. In addition, “0” is set in the general electric operation flag area of the RAM 230 .
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 48, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control processing at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 49, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped and the jackpot game state is not generated.
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning port switch 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the left other winning holes 57a to 57d. Add "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the value of the normal winning ball counter, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning hole 59. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval. This updates the reference value.
At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various productions executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(holding performance)
First, the suspension effect (suspension display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) A pending effect is executed.
The pending effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the game information that is the target of the pending effect (hereinafter referred to as "game information targeted for the pending effect") is suspended, or the pending effect It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display of the special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the pending effect, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 to b3.
Specifically, in the reserved design display area b2, each of the four storage areas (storage area 1 to storage area 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area as a display position (display unit) where the reserved design h is displayed The display position corresponding to is specified.
Further, in the reserved design display area b3, a display position corresponding to one storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area is defined as a display position (display section) where the reserved design h is displayed.

In the pending effect in which the special figure 1 game information is the target pending effect target game information, the pending pattern h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b2.
That is, during the period when the pending effect target game information is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) (after acquiring the pending effect target game information, start based on the pending effect target game information During the period until execution of the determination), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2.
At this time, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the pending effect target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the pending effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (from the execution of the start determination based on the pending effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the pending effect target game information In (middle), a reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

On the other hand, in the pending effect with the special figure 2 game information as the pending effect target game information, the pending pattern h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the pending effect target game information is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (storage area) (after the acquisition of the pending effect target game information, before execution of the start determination based on the pending effect target game information During the period of ), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3.
On the other hand, during the period in which the pending effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (from the execution of the start determination based on the pending effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the pending effect target game information In (middle), a reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area as the special figure 1 game information, and the holding effect for the special figure 1 game information is executed. In this case, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the reserved symbol display area b2 in accordance with the start of the reserved effect.
After that, when the storage area for storing the game information for pending effect is shifted from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, the display area of the pending pattern h corresponding to the game information for the pending effect is changed to the storage area 3. is shifted from the display position corresponding to , to the display position corresponding to storage area 2 .
Further, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the pending effect target game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display area of the pending pattern h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is shifted to the storage area 2. is shifted from the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 .
Furthermore, the storage area for storing the pending effect target game information is shifted from the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1) to the storage area 0, the pending design corresponding to the pending effect target game information The display area of h is shifted from the reserved design display area b2 (the display position corresponding to the storage area 1) to the reserved design display area b1.
Then, according to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved pattern display area b1 is ended, thereby ending the reserved effect. do.

In this embodiment, a normal pending effect and a pending notice effect are defined as types of the pending effect.
"Normal suspension effect" is a type of suspension effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for suspension effect.
In the present embodiment, normal suspension and special suspension are defined as types (modes) of the suspended symbol h.
In the normal pending effect, normal pending is displayed as the pending pattern h corresponding to the game information targeted for the pending effect.
The normal hold effect is that the game information for the hold effect (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) , and ends in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information.

(Holding notice effect)
The "holding notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is a type of pending effect that indicates the result of preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined game information by the mode of the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information targeted for the suspension notice effect is referred to as "suspension notice target game information". Further, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending notice target game information is referred to as the "notice target pending symbol hy".
In the present embodiment, the pending notice effect is the result of advance special symbol pattern determination based on the pending notice target game information (specifically, "small hit symbol", "big hit symbol" or "lost symbol"). It has become.
In the suspension notice effect, a special suspension is displayed as the notice object suspension pattern hy.
In this embodiment, "blue reservation", "green reservation", "purple reservation", and "red reservation" are defined as special reservation modes (types).
Then, in the pending notice effect, the form of the notice target hold pattern hy changes, and depending on the form of the notice target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed, the result of advance determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, Possibility of winning a "big hit" or "small hit") is suggested.
Here, the degree of winning expectation for each mode of special reservation is, in descending order of the degree of winning expectation, “red reservation”, “purple reservation”, “green reservation”, and “blue reservation” (high winning expectation → winning expectation). degree low).
The "winning expectation level" is the possibility (degree) of winning the "big win" or "minor win" when the mode is selected.

When the suspension notice performance is executed, one or a plurality of suspension change opportunities and suspension change contents corresponding to each suspension change opportunity are set. In the pending notice effect, the state of the notice subject pending symbol hy changes according to the content of the pending change corresponding to the pending change opportunity each time the hold change opportunity comes.
The "holding change opportunity" is a trigger for changing the state of the notice target holding symbol hy. Further, the "holding change content" is a content in which the state of the notice subject holding symbol hy is changed.
In this embodiment, as the pending change opportunity, the start of the variable performance corresponding to each preceding pending information, the start of the variable performance corresponding to the pending notice target game information, and the like are defined. Then, when the suspension notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of suspension change opportunities are set from among these suspension change opportunities.
In the present embodiment, the pending notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 game information among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Special figure fluctuation production)
Next, the special figure variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
"Special figure fluctuation effect" is an effect that is executed during the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol/second special symbol).
First, the special figure variation effect (hereinafter referred to as "first special figure variation effect") executed during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described.
The first special figure fluctuation effect is an effect that suggests (notice) the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the first special figure variation effect. . In the present embodiment, the result of the special figure hit determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit" or a "small hit") is suggested by the first special figure variation effect. In addition, the second special figure fluctuation production is a production that does not suggest (notice) the result of the start determination (special figure hit judgment, special figure pattern judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) related to the second special figure fluctuation production ing.
In the first special figure variation production, the first production design z1 is variably displayed in each of the three first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design z2 is displayed in the second production design display area a4. Fluctuating display. In particular, the second effect symbol z2 is always variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 in a fixed manner during execution of the special figure variation effect.
In the following explanation, the first production design z1 displayed in the first production design display area a1 is assumed to be the "left design", and the first production design z1 displayed in the first production design display area a2 is assumed to be the "middle design". , the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a "right symbol".

The first special figure fluctuation production is configured by combining one or more element productions.
In this embodiment, as the element production, "normal fluctuation", "pseudo fluctuation", "temporary excitement (fake)", "tenpai excitement (establishment)", "reach (lost)", "reach (development)", " Developed reach (loss)", "developed reach (hit)", "one-shot announcement (loss)", "one-shot announcement (hit)", "re-lottery" and the like are defined.
Then, the first special figure fluctuation effect is constructed by sequentially executing one or more element effects among the above element effects according to the selected/set effect scenario data.

"Normal variation" is an effect in which a normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3.
The "normal variation display" is a display in which the types of the first performance symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is a position where the first production pattern z1 is stop-displayed in the special figure stop production.
Specifically, in the "normal variation", the normal variation display of each symbol is started sequentially in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

"Pseudo-fluctuation" is content in which temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed after the normal fluctuation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is a production of.
"Temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Concretely, the temporary stop display is a display in which one type of first effect symbol z1 remains in a state of moving in a predetermined manner (swinging, rotating, etc.) at the lottery result display position.
The "stop display" is a display of content in which one type of first effect symbol z1 remains stopped at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in the "pseudo fluctuation", after the normal fluctuation display of each pattern is started in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern, the temporary stop display of each pattern is performed in the order of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern. is executed.
In particular, in each "pseudo-fluctuation", the combinations of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are "missing eye", "reach eye", and "chance eye". and "REG pattern".
The "missing eye" is a combination that is not included in the winning pattern ("REG pattern" in this embodiment) (specifically, the combination of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern that do not match) ( (except for specific combinations described below).
The “reach eyes” are a combination included in the “REG pattern” (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left pattern and the right pattern are the same).
The "chance eye" is a specific combination (for example, "1, 2, 3”, etc.).

"Tenpai Furious (Gase)" is a production that does not establish the reach state after inciting whether or not the reach state is established.
"Reaching state" means that the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two first effect symbol display areas among the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed. The combination of the production pattern z1 is in a state of being a combination included in the "REG pattern" (a state in which the "ready-to-win" is established). In this embodiment, the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping the left symbol and then temporarily stopping the right symbol. During the period in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the normal fluctuation display is continued for the medium symbols.
Specifically, in the case of "temporary fanning (gase)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, in the first effect symbol display area a3, the right symbol of the same type as the temporarily stopped right symbol is displayed. After the display of the content that prompts whether or not the right symbol that has appeared will be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right symbol that has appeared will disappear (pass through the lottery result display position) without being displayed temporarily. display is performed. At this time, a ten-pie-inviting image is displayed during the execution of the display to incite whether or not the right symbol is to be temporarily stopped and displayed.
As a result, the "Tenpai swaying (gase)" is a presentation of content that does not form a reach state.

“Tenpai Instigation (Establishment)” is an effect in which the ready-to-reach state is established after inciting whether or not the ready-to-reach state is established.
Specifically, in the case of "ten-pai fanning (established)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. After appearing and displaying the contents to incite whether or not the appeared right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the content of forming a ready-to-win state is displayed. . At this time, a ten-pie-inviting image is displayed during the execution of the display to incite whether or not the right symbol is to be temporarily stopped and displayed.
As a result, "Tenpai fanning (established)" becomes a presentation of the contents that form the ready-to-win state.

“Reach” is an effect that is executed during the formation of a ready-to-win state, and after inciting whether or not the “REG pattern” is established, the effect of avoiding the establishment of the “REG pattern”. It has become.
Specifically, in "Reach (lost)", after the ready-to-win effect image is displayed during the period in which the left and right symbols are in a ready-to-reach state, a middle symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols is displayed. Temporary stop is displayed.
The "ready-to-win effect image" is a effect image with content that encourages the temporary stop display of the middle symbol of the same kind as the left symbol and the right symbol (the "REG symbol" is established).

"Reach (development)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of a ready-to-win state, and after inciting whether or not the "REG pattern" is established, the effect of avoiding the establishment of the "REG pattern". is executed, then the variable display of the middle pattern is resumed, and then the content is produced that develops from the reach state to the developed reach state.
In the "developed reach state", the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are displayed in reduced size. In this embodiment, the developed reach state is formed by reducing the left and right symbols forming the reach state and displaying them at the upper end of the display screen 31 . In addition, during the period in which the developed reach state is formed, the medium symbols are not displayed.
Specifically, in "reach (development)", after the ready-to-win effect image is displayed during the period in which the left and right symbols are in the ready-to-reach state, the middle symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols is displayed. Temporary stop display is performed, then the variable display of medium symbols is resumed, and then an advanced ready-to-reach state is formed.

"Development reach (outside)" is a production that is executed following "reach (development)". That is, the "development reach (loss)" is an effect executed during the formation of the development reach state, and after inciting whether or not the "REG pattern" is established, the content of missing the establishment of the "REG pattern". It is a production of.
Specifically, in the "development reach (outside)", during the period when the left pattern and the right pattern form the development reach state, after the development reach effect image is displayed, a different type of pattern from the left pattern and the right pattern The middle pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The "advanced ready-to-reach effect image" is a effect image with content that encourages the temporary stop display of the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol (the establishment of the "REG symbol").

"Development reach (hit)" is a production that is executed following "reach (development)". That is, the "development reach (hit)" is an effect executed during the formation of the development reach state, and after inciting whether or not the "REG symbol" is established, the content of the "REG symbol" is established. It is a performance.
Specifically, in the "development reach (hit)", during the period when the left pattern and the right pattern form the development reach state, after the development reach effect image is displayed, the same type as the left pattern and the right pattern The middle pattern of is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"One-shot announcement"("One-shot announcement (loss)", "One-shot announcement (hit)") is a production that is executed following "Tenpai swaying (establishment)". That is, "one-shot notification"("one-shot notification (loss)" / "one-shot notification (hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the ready-to-win state, and is performed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b. It is a production of the content that suggests (informs) whether or not the "REG symbol" is established (whether or not the special symbol lottery is won).
During execution of the "one-shot announcement"("one-shot announcement (loss)"/"one-shot announcement (hit)"), an operation effective period is set. Then, during the operation valid period, the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is validated. On the other hand, the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disabled outside the operation valid period.
In "one-shot announcement"("one-shot announcement (loss)"/"one-shot announcement (hit)"), the effective operation period starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Then, the predetermined valid time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of times the pressing operation of the effect button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). , the valid operation period ends when any one of the conditions is established.
In the "one-shot notification"("one-shot notification (loss)" / "one-shot notification (hit)"), at the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the predetermined effective time, or detection of pressing operation of the production button 5b) In response, the notification image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
The "announcement image" is a performance image that suggests (informs) whether or not the "REG symbol" is established (whether or not the special symbol lottery is won).
In particular, in the "one-shot announcement (win)", an "announcement image (win)" is displayed as an announcement image that suggests (informs) that the "REG symbol" is established (won).
On the other hand, in the case of "one-shot notification (loss)", a "notification image (loss)" is displayed as a notification image that suggests (informs) that the "REG pattern" is not established (failed).

The "re-lottery" is an effect that is executed after the establishment of the "REG symbol"("pseudofluctuation","advanced reach (hit)", "one-shot announcement", etc.). The "re-lottery" is a production of the content that incites whether or not the established "REG pattern" will be promoted to the "BIG pattern". At this time, the "re-lottery" is for presentation purposes and is not actually executed.
In this embodiment, if the result of the special figure per determination based on the special figure 1 game information is winning ("big hit" or "small hit"), the last As element production, "re-lottery" is always executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information is "loss", the "REG symbol" is not established, so the "re-lottery" is not executed.
Specifically, the "re-lottery" is executed during the period when the "REG symbol" is established (temporary stop display). In the "re-lottery", a re-lottery image is displayed on the display screen 31a while the "REG symbol" is established (temporary stop display).
The ``re-lottery image'' is a performance image with the contents of inciting whether or not the ``REG symbol'' will be promoted to the ``BIG symbol''. The re-lottery image according to the present embodiment is a production image showing the content of a battle between a friend character and an enemy character. In particular, when the result of the special symbol determination is "BIG bonus", a re-lottery image showing that the ally character wins over the enemy character is displayed as the re-lottery image. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol determination is "REG bonus", a re-lottery image showing that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed as the re-lottery image.

Next, the special figure fluctuation production (hereinafter referred to as "second special figure fluctuation production") executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol will be described.
The second special figure variation effect is composed only of mini symbol variation display. That is, the second special figure fluctuation production does not include the above element production.
The "mini symbol variation display" is a variation display by the first effect symbol z1 (left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) reduced compared to the normal variation display.
In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the initial bonus set to the end of the final bonus set (initial bonus set or continuous bonus set) (hereinafter referred to as "bonus period"), the "BIG bonus effect ” is executed. As a result, multiple "bonuses" included in the bonus period are produced like a series of "bonuses."
Therefore, during the variable display of the second special symbol each time, the "BIG bonus effect" started according to the "first hit" is continuously executed.
Therefore, by executing only the mini-figure variation display as the second special figure variation presentation, it is possible to prevent the "BIG bonus presentation" from being hindered. It should be noted that during the bonus period, a main announcement effect, which will be described later, is not executed either.

(Special stop effect)
Next, the special figure stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
"Special figure stop effect" is an effect that is executed during the stop display of the special symbol.
In the special symbol stop effect executed during the stop display of the first special symbol, the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol is displayed. In the area a4, the second effect symbol z2 is stop-displayed.
On the other hand, the special symbol stop effect executed during the stop display of the second special symbol is composed only of "mini symbol stop display". The "mini symbol stop display" is a stop display of the first effect symbol z1 (left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) reduced compared to the normal variable display.

(main notice production)
Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
"Main notice effect" is a effect that is executed during the first special figure fluctuation effect, and the start determination related to the first special figure variation effect (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination etc.). It should be noted that the main notice effect is not executed during the second special figure fluctuation effect.
In this embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol" or a "small winning symbol").
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types with different content of effects are defined as the types of the main notice effect. Then, the type of the main notice effect to be executed during the first special figure fluctuation effect is selected according to the contents of the element effects constituting the first special figure fluctuation effect.

(Winning performance)
Next, the winning effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The winning effect is an effect executed during the "bonus" (small winning game state/big winning game state).
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, "BIG bonus effect" is executed during the bonus period.
The "BIG bonus effect" is an effect that suggests (informs) that the bonus period is in progress.
Here, the "bonus period" is a period from the start of the "first win" to the end of the remaining reserved bonus related to the "REG bonus". Therefore, the "BIG bonus effect" is started according to the start of the "first hit", and the "BIG bonus effect" is ended according to the end of the remaining reserved bonus related to the "REG bonus". During the bonus period, the "BIG bonus effect" is continued through the occurrence of the big win game state, the occurrence of the small win game state, the variable display of the second special symbol, the stop display of the second special symbol, and the like. be.
At this time, during the bonus period, the more times V avoidance strikes are executed, the longer the bonus period becomes, and as a result, it is possible to watch the "BIG bonus effect" for a long time (up to the scene near the end). .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when "REG bonus" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, "REG bonus presentation" is executed during the bonus (small win game state/big win game state).
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested in the "REB bonus effect".
Specifically, in the "REB bonus effect", a character card appears on the display screen 31a at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a predetermined number of rounds). Then, depending on the type of character card that appears, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested.
In this embodiment, "character A card", "character B card", "character C card", and "character D card" are defined as the types of character cards.
And the high expectations for each type of character card are "Character A card", "Character B card", "Character C card", "Character D card" (high setting) (high waiting level → high setting low waiting level).
"High set expectation" is the possibility (degree) that the value set in the set value area is a high set value (for example, a value of "4" or more) when a character card of the type appears. It's becoming
This allows the player to predict the value (set value) set in the set value area based on the type of character card that has appeared.

(Customer waiting performance)
Next, the customer waiting effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The customer waiting effect is an effect executed during the customer waiting state.
"Customer waiting state" is a state in which special games (variation display/stop display of special symbols, small winning game state, and big winning game state) are not executed. In this embodiment, the customer waiting state is started in response to reception of the demonstration designation command. In addition, in response to the reception of the reservation number designation command specifying the increase in the number of reservations during the customer waiting state (detection of the game ball entering the start port 51, 52 and acquisition of special game information), the customer waiting state is terminated.
The customer waiting effect is started when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the customer waiting state, and is ended when the customer waiting state ends.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the value (set value) set in the set value area is suggested in the customer waiting effect. At this time, in the customer waiting effect, a value (set value) set in the set value area is indicated by a method different from that of the "REG bonus effect".

Specifically, during execution of the customer waiting effect, a customer waiting effect screen is displayed on the display screen 31a. And on the customer waiting effect screen, information indirectly suggesting the number of 100G inner houses, information indirectly suggesting the BIG bonus ratio, information indirectly suggesting the number of balls acquired during the BIG bonus, total number of rotations Information that indirectly suggests the probability of a big hit, information that indirectly suggests the probability, and the like are displayed. This allows the player to predict the value (set value) set in the set value area based on the displayed various information.
The "number of 100G inner houses" is the number of times a "big hit" or a "small hit" has been won among the past 100 [time] special symbol lotteries. This indirectly suggests that the larger the number of 100G inner reams, the larger the value set in the set value area.
“Number of winning balls during BIG bonus” is the average number of winning balls obtained during one “BIG bonus”. The larger the number of balls obtained during the BIG bonus, the more likely it is that a good player has been playing in the past (the good player has continued to play while predicting that the setting will be high). , indirectly suggests that the value set in the set value area is a large value.
"Total number of rotations" is the total number of special symbol lotteries executed on the day. It is suggested that the larger the "total number of rotations", the longer the game (operation) was executed in the past (the player predicted that the setting was high and the long game was executed). , as a result, it indirectly suggests that the value set in the set value area is a large value.
As for the "BIG bonus percentage" and the "jackpot probability", the values set in the set value areas are relatively directly suggested.

(About production mode)
Next, the effect modes selected and set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
57 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure variation production corresponding to production mode A. FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the effect mode B. FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the flow of the first special figure variation production corresponding to production mode C. FIG.
In the pachinko machine 1, three types of performance modes ("performance mode A" to "performance mode C") are specified, and the player selects and selects one of the three types of performance modes. It is possible to set. Then, the mode of various effects becomes a mode corresponding to the selected and set effect mode.

Specifically, the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is provided with a performance mode flag area. Information designating the selected presentation mode is set (stored) in the presentation mode flag area.
In the present embodiment, the mode of the suspension effect, the suspension notice effect, the first special figure fluctuation effect, the special figure stop effect, the main notice effect, the first effect pattern z1, the background image, the interface image, etc. is selected and set. It becomes the aspect according to the mode. On the other hand, the aspects such as the second special figure fluctuation effect, the winning effect, and the customer waiting effect are common in all the effect modes.
The "interface image" is an image that decorates the periphery of the effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, the interface image is an image that defines the position where the first effect symbol z1 is displayed, the position where the reserved symbol h is displayed, and the like.
The “background image” is an image that serves as the background of the first production pattern z1.
In particular, in "production mode A" to "production mode C", suspension effect, suspension notice effect, first special figure fluctuation effect, special figure stop effect, main notice effect, first effect pattern z1, background image, interface image, etc. Since the aspects of (1) are greatly different, it is possible to give a player the impression of playing a game of a different model by changing the performance mode in one pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

That is, in the present embodiment, modes corresponding to each of "effect mode A" to "effect mode C" are defined as modes of pending effects (specifically, effect scenario data). Then, when the pending effect is executed, a mode corresponding to the set effect mode is selected and set as the mode of the pending effect. As a result, a pending effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the set effect mode. At this time, in the present embodiment, the scenario of the pending effect, the mode of the pending pattern h, and the like change according to the set effect mode.
In addition, modes corresponding to each of "effect mode A" to "effect mode C" are defined as modes of pending advance notice effects (specifically, effect scenario data). Then, when the pending notice effect is executed, a mode corresponding to the set effect mode is selected and set as the mode of the pending notice effect. As a result, the pending notice effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the set effect mode. At this time, in the present embodiment, the scenario of the pending notice effect, the state of the notice object pending symbol hy, and the like change according to the set effect mode.

In addition, as the aspect of the first special figure fluctuation production (specifically, production scenario data), the aspect corresponding to each of "production mode A" to "production mode C" is defined. And, when the first special figure fluctuation production is executed, the aspect corresponding to the set production mode is selected and set as the aspect of the first special figure fluctuation production. By this, the 1st special figure fluctuation production of the mode corresponding to the production mode set is performed. At this time, in this embodiment, the scenario of the first special figure fluctuation production, the aspect (type) of the first production pattern z1, the aspect (type) of the background image of the first production pattern z1, the aspect (type) of the element production, etc. changes according to the set production mode.
Here, as described above, depending on the combination of the variation mode number specified by the variation mode specification command and the variation pattern number specified by the variation pattern specification command (hereinafter referred to as "variation scale pattern"), the production Scenario data is selected. The first special figure fluctuation effect is configured by sequentially executing one or a plurality of element effects according to the selected effect scenario data.
In particular, in the present embodiment, for all variable scale patterns, the effect scenario data corresponding to each variable scale pattern is the effect scenario data corresponding to "effect mode A" and the effect scenario data corresponding to "effect mode B". and production scenario data corresponding to "production mode C". In addition, elemental effects corresponding to each of "production mode A" to "production mode C" are defined.
Then, in the production scenario data corresponding to the "production mode A", the first special figure fluctuation production is composed only of the element production corresponding to the "production mode A" (excluding the mode transition notice production described later).
On the other hand, in the production scenario data corresponding to the "production mode B", the first special figure fluctuation production is composed only of the element production corresponding to the "production mode B" (excluding the mode transition notice production described later).
On the other hand, in the production scenario data corresponding to the "production mode C", the first special figure fluctuation production is composed only of the element production corresponding to the "production mode C" (excluding the mode transition notice production described later).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as element effects corresponding to the "production mode A", "Normal variation A", "Temperature upswing (gase) A", "Lower upswing (establishment) A", "Reach (loss) A ”, “Reach (development)”, “Development reach (loss) A1” to “Development reach (loss) A5”, “Development reach (hit) A1” to “Development reach (hit) A5”, “Re-lottery A1” ~ "re-lottery A5" etc. are stipulated. And the 1st special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode A" is constituted by combining one or more of these element productions.
In particular, in the first special figure variation performance corresponding to the "performance mode A", "pseudo variation", "one-shot announcement (loss)", "one-shot announcement (hit)", etc. are not executed.
As a result, the first special figure variation production corresponding to the "production mode A" mainly proceeds in the following first to fourth flows. Note that the first to third flows are selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss ("lost"). On the other hand, the fourth flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is winning ("big win" or "minor win").
As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the first flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation production, first, "normal variation A" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (gase) A" is performed. It is executed, and the first special figure fluctuation effect is completed by the end of the "tenpai fanning (gase) A".
As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the second flow, according to the start of the first special figure variation effect, first, "normal variation A" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (formation) A" is performed. After that, "reach (loss) A" is executed, and the first special figure fluctuation effect is completed by the end of "reach (loss) A".
As shown in FIG. 57(c), in the third flow, according to the start of the first special figure variation effect, first, "normal variation A" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (established) A" is performed. Executed, after that, "reach (development)" is executed, and then, among "development reach (loss) A1" to "development reach (loss) A5", any "development reach (loss)" is executed , With the end of the "development reach (loss)", the first special figure fluctuation effect ends.
As shown in FIG. 57(d), in the fourth flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation effect, first, "normal variation A" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (formation) A" is performed. Executed, then "reach (development)" is executed, after that, one of "development reach (hit) A1" to "development reach (hit) A5" is executed After that, one of the "re-lottery" from "re-lottery A1" to "re-lottery A5" is executed, and when the "re-lottery" ends, the first special figure variation effect ends.
As described above, in the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode A", mainly whether or not it develops into "development reach" (development reach production image), "development reach" that develops after "reach (development)" ” (developed reach effect image) and the type of effect that arouses the expectations of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the element effects corresponding to the "production mode B", "Normal variation B", "Temperature sway (gase) B1" to "Temperature sway (gase) B5", and 'Temperature sway (established) B1' ” to “Tenpai Inciting (Accepted) B5”, “One-shot Announcement (Loss)”, “One-shot Announcement (Hit)”, “Re-lottery B1” to “Re-lottery B5”, etc. are defined. And the 1st special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode B" is constituted by combining one or more of these element productions.
In particular, in the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode B", "pseudo fluctuation", "reach (loss)", "reach (development)", "development reach (loss)", "development reach (hit) )” etc. will not be executed.
As a result, the first special figure variation production corresponding to the "production mode B" mainly progresses in the following first to third flows. Note that the first and second flows are selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss ("lost"). On the other hand, the third flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is winning ("big win" or "minor win").
As shown in FIG. 58(a), in the first flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation effect, first, "normal variation B" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (gase) B1" ~ One of the ``temporary agitation (gase) B5'' is executed, and the 1st special figure variation effect is completed by the end of the said ``tempa agitation (gase)''.
As shown in FIG. 58(b), in the second flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation effect, first, "normal variation B" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (formation) B1" ~ One of "Tenpai agitation (established) B5" is executed, then "One shot announcement (missed)" is executed, and the "One shot announcement (missed)" ends With this, the first special figure variation production ends.
As shown in FIG. 58(c), in the third flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation production, first, "normal variation B" is executed, and then "tenpai fanning (formation) B1" ~ Of the "tenpai fanning (established) B5", one of "tenpai fanning (established)" is executed, then "one-shot announcement (hit)" is executed, and then "re-lottery B1" ~ "re-lottery B5", one of the "re-lottery" is executed, and the first special figure fluctuation effect is completed by the end of the "re-lottery".
As described above, in the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode B", mainly based on whether or not the tenpai (reach eye) is established, and the contents of the "one-shot notification" (notification image), It becomes the content of the performance that arouses the expectations of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, "pseudo fluctuation", "re-lottery C1" to "re-lottery C5", etc. are defined as elemental effects corresponding to "production mode C". And the 1st special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode C" is constituted by combining one or more of these element productions.
In particular, in the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode C", "normal fluctuation", "tenpai fanning (gase)", "tenpai fanning (formation)", "reach (lost)", "reach (development) )”, “developed reach (loss)”, “development reach (hit)”, “one-shot announcement (loss)”, “one-shot announcement (hit)”, etc. are not executed.
As a result, the first special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the "production mode C" is mainly composed of a plurality of "pseudo fluctuations", and the production is composed of "missing eye", "reach eye", and "chance eye". Or, the temporary stop display of "REG symbol" continues at a good tempo.
Concretely, the 1st special-figure fluctuation production corresponding to "production mode C" is the following 1st or 2nd flow, and the production content progresses. Note that the first flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss ("lost"). On the other hand, the second flow is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is winning ("big win" or "minor win").
As shown in FIG. 59(a), in the first flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation production, a plurality of "pseudo variations" are repeatedly executed, and in the final "pseudo variation", ""Losseye" is temporarily stopped and displayed, thereby ending the first special figure variation effect.
As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the second flow, in response to the start of the first special figure variation effect, a plurality of "pseudo fluctuations" are repeatedly executed, and in the final "pseudo fluctuations", " REG pattern" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, one of "re-lottery C1" to "re-lottery C5" is executed, and by the end of the "re-lottery", the first special figure fluctuation The performance ends.
As described above, in the first special figure variation effect corresponding to the "production mode C", mainly based on whether or not the chance eye/ready eye eye is established, the player's expectations are heightened. At this time, the probability of winning is improved by successively establishing "reach points", establishing "chance points", and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the mode of the first special figure stop effect (specifically, the effect scenario data), the modes corresponding to each of the "production mode A" to "production mode C" are defined. Then, when the first special figure stop effect is executed, the aspect corresponding to the set effect mode is selected and set as the aspect of the first special figure stop effect. As a result, the first special figure stop production of the mode corresponding to the set production mode is executed. At this time, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the first production pattern z1, the aspect of the background image of the first production pattern z1, and the like change according to the set production mode.
In addition, as the types of the main announcement effect (specifically, effect scenario data), types corresponding to each of "effect mode A" to "effect mode C" are defined. Then, when the main notice effect is executed, the main notice effect of the type corresponding to the set effect mode is executed (except when the mode transition notice effect described later is executed).

(About selection of production mode)
Next, selection of an effect mode in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing screen transitions during the customer waiting state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode selection screen.
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 starts the customer waiting state in response to the reception of the demo designation command. At the start of the customer waiting state, the in-game screen (specifically, the screen displayed when the game was interrupted) is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the playing screen to the customer waiting effect screen in response to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the customer waiting state.
Further, the display of the display screen 31a shifts from the customer waiting effect screen to the effect mode selection screen in response to detection of the pressing operation of the up key button while the customer waiting effect screen is being displayed.
On the other hand, in response to the reception of the number-of-holds designation command specifying an increase in the number of reservations during the display of the customer waiting effect screen (detection of entry of game balls to start ports 51 and 52, acquisition of special game information), The display of the display screen 31a shifts from the customer waiting effect screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen at the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the acquired special symbol game information).
Furthermore, the display of the display screen 31a shifts from the effect mode selection screen to the customer waiting effect screen in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the down key button (back button) while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed.
On the other hand, in response to detection of pressing operation of the effect button 5b (determination button) while the effect mode selection screen is displayed, reproduction of the mode determination voice described later is started, and display is performed according to the completion of reproduction of the mode determination voice. The display of the screen 31a shifts from the effect mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen displayed when the game was interrupted).
On the other hand, in response to the reception of the pending number designation command specifying an increase in the pending number during the display of the production mode selection screen (detection of the game ball entering the start port 51, 52 and acquisition of special game information), The display of the display screen 31a shifts from the production mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen at the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the acquired special symbol game information).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to select and change the performance mode while the performance mode selection screen is being displayed.
As shown in FIG. 61, an effect mode explanation image g is displayed on the effect mode selection screen.
The effect mode explanation image g is an image for explaining the contents (features/outline) of the effect corresponding to the effect mode to be selected.
In this embodiment, as the effect mode explanation image g, the effect mode explanation image A corresponding to the effect mode A, the effect mode explanation image B corresponding to the effect mode B, and the effect mode explanation image C corresponding to the effect mode C. , are stipulated.
Production mode explanation image A displays the mode name of production mode A, displays information explaining the contents (features and outlines) of production corresponding to production mode A, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode A. and displaying the profile of character A.
Production mode explanation image B displays the mode name of production mode B, displays information explaining the contents (features and outlines) of production corresponding to production mode B, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode B. and displaying the profile of character B.
The production mode explanation image C displays the mode name of production mode C, displays information explaining the details (features and outlines) of the production corresponding to production mode C, and appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode C. and displaying the profile of character C.
In addition, information explaining various operation methods is displayed on the production mode selection screen.
In this embodiment, on the effect mode selection screen, the information explaining that the down key button is pressed to return to the customer waiting effect screen, and the effect mode to be selected by pressing the left and right key buttons are changed. and information explaining that the presentation mode to be selected is determined (set/confirmed) by pressing the presentation button 5b.

When shifting to the effect mode selection screen, the effect mode explanation image g corresponding to the information (the effect mode being set) set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 is displayed on the effect mode selection screen.
During the display of the production mode selection screen, each time the pressing operation of the left and right key buttons is detected, the production mode to be selected is changed, and the production mode displayed on the production mode selection screen is changed. The type of explanatory image g is changed. At this time, an effect mode explanation image g corresponding to the effect mode to be selected is displayed on the effect mode selection screen.
For example, each time the pressing operation of the right key button is detected, the production modes to be selected are changed in the order of production mode A, production mode B, production mode C, production mode A, . . . The type of the effect mode explanation image g displayed on the effect mode selection screen is changed in order of the effect mode explanation image A, the effect mode explanation image B, the effect mode explanation image C, the effect mode explanation image A, and so on.
Similarly, each time a pressing operation of the left key button is detected, the presentation mode to be selected is changed in the order of presentation mode C, presentation mode B, presentation mode A, presentation mode C, and so on. , the type of the effect mode description image g displayed on the effect mode selection screen is changed in the order of effect mode description image C, effect mode description image B, effect mode description image A, effect mode description image C, .

Then, during the display of the effect mode selection screen, when the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected, the selection of the effect mode to be selected is determined (confirmed) accordingly, and the selection is determined. Information designating the effect mode is set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 .
That is, when the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected in a state in which the effect mode A is selected (a state in which the effect mode explanation image A is displayed on the effect mode selection screen), the effect Information designating mode A is set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected in the state where the production mode B is selected (the production mode explanation image B is displayed on the production mode selection screen), the production is performed accordingly. Information designating mode B is set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 .
On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected in the state where the production mode C is selected (the production mode explanation image C is displayed on the production mode selection screen), the production is performed accordingly. Information designating mode C is set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 .
As described above, the player can select and change the effect mode while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed.

(Sound effect executed while the effect mode selection screen is displayed)
Next, the sound effect executed while the effect mode selection screen is displayed will be described.
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the data structure of the mode explanation voice. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the data structure of the mode decision voice. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the transition of sound effect when pressing of various buttons is detected during reproduction of mode explanation voice. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the transition of the sound effect when a pending winning occurs during reproduction of the mode explanation voice or mode determination voice.
In the pachinko machine 1, while the production mode selection screen is being displayed, various sound productions (mode explanation voices to be described later) are detected in response to the detection of pressing operations of various buttons (left/right key buttons, down key button/production button 5b). playback, playback of a mode determination voice described later, playback of a button sound effect c described later, etc.) are executed.

(mode explanation voice)
First, the mode explanation voice will be explained.
While the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, the mode explanation voice is reproduced (output) each time the left/right key button (selection button) pressing operation is detected. At this time, reproduction of the mode explanation voice is started in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the left/right key buttons (selection buttons).
That is, as described above, during the display of the presentation mode selection screen, each time the pressing operation of the left and right key buttons is detected, the presentation mode to be selected is changed, and the presentation mode selection screen is displayed. is changed.
At this time, along with the change of the production mode to be selected, the mode explanation voice corresponding to the production mode after the change is reproduced (output). In other words, when the type of the effect mode explanation image g displayed on the effect mode screen is changed, the mode explanation voice corresponding to the type of the effect mode explanation image g after the change is reproduced (output).

The "mode explanation voice" is a production sound (sound production) that suggests (informs) the production mode to be selected. The mode explanation voice is composed of a predetermined performance scale (performance time and performance length). In the present embodiment, 15.0 [s] is defined as the duration of the mode explanation voice. The mode explanation voice includes a button sound effect and a mode explanation voice.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode explanation voice is formed by making the button effect sound and the mode explanation voice integral (series) of voice data. At this time, the mode explanation voice is configured such that the button sound effect is reproduced first, and the mode explanation sound is reproduced after the reproduction of the button sound effect is completed.
Here, when the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound are configured as separate audio data, it is necessary to register the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound in individual tracks in order to reproduce the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound. The number of tracks required for playback increases.
Therefore, by constructing the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound as integrated audio data, it is sufficient to register the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound in one track when reproducing the button sound effect and the mode explanation sound. It is possible to suppress the increase.
The "button sound effect" is a sound effect (SE: Sound Effect) indicating that the pressing operation of the left and right key buttons (selection button) has been detected.
The "mode explanation voice" is a voice for explaining information about the presentation mode to be selected. Specifically, in the mode explanation voice, the mode name of the production mode to be selected, the content of the production corresponding to the production mode to be selected (features / overview), and the production mode corresponding to the production mode to be selected Information about the profile of the character appearing as the main character in the production is explained by the voice of the character corresponding to the production mode to be selected.
In the present embodiment, as the mode explanation voices, mode explanation voice A corresponding to production mode A (production mode explanation image A), mode explanation voice B corresponding to production mode B (production mode explanation image B), and production mode A mode explanation voice C corresponding to C (effect mode explanation image C) is defined.

The mode explanation voice A, the mode explanation voice B, and the mode explanation voice C share the same button sound effect content, but differ in the mode explanation voice content.
That is, the contents of the button sound effects included in the mode explanation voice A, the contents of the button sound effects contained in the mode explanation voice B, and the contents of the button sound effects contained in the mode explanation voice C are the same. . In this embodiment, mode explanation voice A, mode explanation voice B, and mode explanation voice C include button sound effect a as the button sound effect. Here, button sound effect a, button sound effect b described later, and button sound effect c described later have contents (sound effects) different from each other.
On the other hand, the contents of the mode explanation voice included in the mode explanation voice A, the contents of the mode explanation voice contained in the mode explanation voice B, and the contents of the mode explanation voice contained in the mode explanation voice C are different from each other. In this embodiment, mode explanation voice A includes mode explanation voice a as mode explanation voice. On the other hand, mode explanation voice B includes mode explanation voice b as mode explanation voice. On the other hand, mode explanation voice C includes mode explanation voice c as mode explanation voice.
Mode explanation voice a is the mode name of production mode A, the contents of production corresponding to production mode A (features / overview), information about character A who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode A, etc. It is a voice that explains by voice.
Mode explanation voice b is the mode name of production mode B, the contents of production corresponding to production mode B (features and overview), information about character B who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to production mode B, etc. It is a voice that explains by voice.
The mode explanation voice c is the mode name of the production mode C, the contents of the production corresponding to the production mode C (features/outline), the information about the character C who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to the production mode C, etc. It is a voice that explains by voice.

Then, in response to detection of the pressing operation of the left and right key buttons, when production mode A is selected (when production mode explanation image A is displayed), mode explanation voice is produced in response to the detection. Playback of A is started.
On the other hand, when the effect mode B is selected (when the effect mode explanation image B is displayed) in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the left/right key buttons, the mode explanation voice is generated in response to the detection. Playback of B is started.
On the other hand, when the effect mode C is selected (when the effect mode explanation image B is displayed) in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the left/right key buttons, the mode explanation voice is generated in response to the detection. Playback of C is started.

(mode decision voice)
Next, the mode decision voice will be explained.
During the display of the effect mode selection screen, reproduction of the mode determination voice is started in response to detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b.
That is, as described above, during the display of the production mode selection screen, when the operation of pressing the production button 5b is detected, the selection of the production mode to be selected is determined (confirmed), and the production mode is selected. Designated information is set in the effect mode flag area of the DRAM 304 .
At this time, the mode determination voice corresponding to the determined effect mode is reproduced (output) along with the determination of the selection of the effect mode to be selected.

The "mode determination voice" is an effect sound (sound effect) that suggests (informs) that the selection of the effect mode has been determined (confirmed) and the determined effect mode. The mode determination voice is composed of a predetermined performance scale (performance time and performance length). Here, the duration of the mode determination voice is shorter than the duration of the mode explanation voice. In the present embodiment, 5.0 [s] is defined as the duration of the mode determination voice. The mode decision voice includes a button sound effect and a mode decision voice.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 63, the mode determination voice is formed by combining the button effect sound and the mode determination voice into one (series) of voice data. At this time, the mode determination voice is configured such that the button sound effect is reproduced first, and the mode determination voice is reproduced after the reproduction of the button sound effect is completed. With this, just like the mode explanation voice, when playing back the button sound effect and mode decision voice, it is enough to register them in one track, so it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of tracks required for playback. Become.
The "button sound effect" is a sound effect (SE: Sound Effect) indicating that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b (enter button) has been detected.
"Mode determination voice" is a voice related to the determined production mode. Specifically, in the mode determination voice, the voice of the character who appears as the main character in the production corresponding to the determined production mode is uttered. By this, the determined production mode is indirectly suggested (notified).
In this embodiment, mode determination voice A corresponding to production mode A, mode determination voice B corresponding to production mode B, and mode determination voice C corresponding to production mode C are defined as mode determination voices. there is

The mode determination voice A, mode determination voice B, and mode determination voice C have the same button sound effect content, but differ in the mode determination voice content.
That is, the content of the button sound effects included in the mode determination voice A, the content of the button sound effects included in the mode determination voice B, and the content of the button sound effects included in the mode determination voice C are the same. . In this embodiment, mode determination voice A, mode determination voice B, and mode determination voice C include button sound effect b as a button sound effect.
On the other hand, the content of the mode determination voice included in mode determination voice A, the content of the mode determination voice included in mode determination voice B, and the content of the mode determination voice included in mode determination voice C are different from each other. In this embodiment, mode decision voice A includes mode decision voice a as a mode decision voice. On the other hand, mode decision voice B includes mode decision voice b as a mode decision voice. On the other hand, the mode decision voice C includes a mode decision voice c as a mode decision voice.
The mode determination sound a is a sound in which the character A's voice corresponding to the production mode A is uttered.
The mode determination sound b is a sound in which the character B's voice corresponding to the production mode B is uttered.
The mode determination sound c is a sound in which the character C's voice corresponding to the production mode C is uttered.

Then, when the selection of the effect mode A is determined according to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b, the reproduction of the mode determination voice A is started according to the detection.
On the other hand, when the selection of the effect mode B is determined according to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b, the reproduction of the mode determination voice B is started according to the detection.
On the other hand, when the selection of the effect mode C is determined according to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b, the reproduction of the mode determination voice C is started according to the detection.

(Button sound effect c)
Next, the button sound effect c will be described.
While the presentation mode selection screen is being displayed, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is started in response to detection of the pressing operation of the down key button.
That is, as described above, while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, the display of the display screen 31a changes from the effect mode selection screen to the customer waiting effect screen in response to detection of the pressing operation of the down key button (back button). Transition.
At this time, the button sound effect c is reproduced (output) as the effect mode selection screen shifts to the customer waiting effect screen.
The "button effect sound c" is a production sound (sound production) composed of a predetermined production scale (production time/production length). The performance duration of the button sound effect c is set to be shorter than the performance duration of the mode determination voice. In the present embodiment, 1.0 [s] is defined as the effect duration of the button sound effect c.
The button sound effect c is a sound effect (SE: Sound Effect) indicating that the operation of pressing the down key button (back button) has been detected.

(Regarding the transition of sound effects)
Next, the transition of sound effects will be described.
As described above, the mode explanation voice is made up of a performance scale of 15.0 [s]. As a result, reproduction of the mode explanation voice is completed (finished) after 15.0 [s] from its start.
In particular, when a pressing operation of various buttons is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted (ended/stopped) accordingly.

That is, when a pressing operation of the left/right key buttons (selection buttons) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to the track x and reproduced by the track x.
Here, as described above, while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, the effect mode to be selected is changed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the left/right key buttons, and the effect after the change is changed. Playback of the mode explanation voice corresponding to the mode is started.
At this time, when the pressing operation of the left and right key buttons is detected during the reproduction of the first mode explanation voice by the track x, the information registered in the track x is changed to the first mode. The information designating reproduction of the explanation voice is replaced (overwritten) with information designating reproduction of the second mode explanation voice corresponding to the changed effect mode.
As a result, when the pressing of the left and right key buttons is detected during the reproduction of the first mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the first mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly, and the changed Reproduction of the second mode explanation voice corresponding to the presentation mode is started.
For example, when the operation of pressing the left and right key buttons is detected during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice A, and accordingly the production mode to be selected is changed from the production mode A to the production mode B. , mode explanation voice A is interrupted and reproduction of mode explanation voice B is started in response to detection of pressing operations of the left and right key buttons.

Further, when the pressing operation of the effect button 5b (enter button) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the mode explanation voice and the mode determination voice are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to the track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the mode determination voice is always registered (assigned) to the track y and reproduced by the track y.
Here, as described above, during the display of the effect mode selection screen, the effect mode to be selected is determined in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b, and the determined effect mode is selected. Playback of the corresponding mode decision voice is started.
At this time, when the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice by the track x, the reproduction of the track x is stopped accordingly, and the determined effect mode is detected in the track y. Information designating reproduction of the mode decision voice corresponding to is registered.
As a result, when the pressing operation of the production button 5b is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly, and the mode decision voice corresponding to the decided production mode is detected. starts playing.
For example, during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice A, if the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected and accordingly, the selection of the effect mode A is determined, in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b , the mode explanation voice A is interrupted, and the reproduction of the mode determination voice A is started.

Further, when a pressing operation of the lower key button (back button) is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice being reproduced is interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(c), the mode explanation voice and the button sound effect c are registered (assigned) to different tracks. Here, the button sound effect c and the mode determination voice are registered (assigned) to the same track. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to the track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the button sound effect c is always registered (assigned) to the track y and reproduced by the track y.
Here, as described above, while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, the display of the display screen 31a shifts from the effect mode selection screen to the customer waiting effect screen in response to detection of the pressing operation of the down key button. , the reproduction of the button sound effect c is started.
At this time, when the pressing operation of the down key button is detected while the mode explanation voice is being reproduced by the track x, the reproduction of the track x is stopped in response to this, and the button effect sound c is produced in the track y. Information specifying playback is registered. After the start of reproduction of the button sound effect c, information designating reproduction of a sound effect constituting the customer waiting effect (hereinafter referred to as "customer waiting effect sound") is registered in the track c.
As a result, when a pressing operation of the down key button is detected during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted in response to this, and reproduction of the button sound effect c is started. , the reproduction of the customer waiting effect sound is started.
For example, when a pressing operation of the down key button is detected during reproduction of mode explanation voice A, mode explanation voice A is interrupted and reproduction of button effect sound c is started accordingly.

Also, if a pending winning occurs during reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly.
"Holding winning occurs" means that the entry of the game ball to the start ports 51 and 52 is detected, the special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired, It means that it receives a pending number designation command specifying an increase in the pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number).
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the mode explanation voice, the pending prize-winning sound, and the fluctuating effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, the mode explanation voice is always registered (assigned) to the track x and reproduced by the track x. On the other hand, the pending prize winning sound is always registered (assigned) to the track a and reproduced by the track a. On the other hand, the fluctuating effect sound is always registered (assigned) to the track b and reproduced by the track b.
The "holding prize winning sound" is a production sound (sound production) that suggests (announces) the occurrence of a pending prize winning. The reserved prize-winning sound is a sound effect (SE: Sound Effect) composed of a predetermined performance scale (performance time and performance length). The effect duration of the pending winning sound is shorter than the duration of the mode determination voice. In the present embodiment, 1.0 [s] is defined as the effect duration of the pending winning sound. The pending winning sound is reproduced (output) in response to the occurrence of the pending winning. In other words, the pending winning sound is reproduced each time a pending winning occurs.
"Variation production sound" is a production sound (sound production) that constitutes a special figure fluctuation production.
Here, during the display of the production mode selection screen, the display of the display screen 31a changes from the customer waiting production screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the acquired special game information) according to the occurrence of the pending winning. The screen at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on), and the playback of the pending winning sound is started.
At this time, if pending winning occurs while the mode explanation voice is being played back by track x, the playback of track x is stopped accordingly, and information designating playback of the pending winning sound is registered in track a. At the same time, information designating reproduction of the fluctuating effect sound is registered in the track b.
Thus, when pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted and the reproduction of the pending prize winning sound and the variable effect sound are started accordingly.
For example, when pending winning occurs during reproduction of mode explanation voice A, mode explanation voice A is interrupted accordingly, and reproduction of pending winning sound and variable effect sound are started.
As described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reproduction of the mode explanation voice overlaps with the reproduction of the game-related effect sound (holding winning sound, variable effect sound, etc.), and the situation in which the reproduction of the mode explanation voice interferes with the reproduction of the game-related effect sound. It becomes possible to

On the other hand, as described above, the mode determination voice is composed of a performance scale of 5.0 [s]. As a result, reproduction of the mode decision voice is completed (finished) after 5.0 [s] have passed since its start.
In particular, as described above, when pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly. On the other hand, even if pending winning occurs during reproduction of the mode determination voice, the reproduction of the mode determination voice is not interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the mode determination voice, the pending winning sound, and the fluctuating effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, as described above, the mode determination voice is always registered (assigned) to track y and reproduced by track y. On the other hand, the pending prize winning sound is always registered (assigned) to the track a and reproduced by the track a. On the other hand, the fluctuating effect sound is always registered (assigned) to the track b and reproduced by the track b.
Here, as described above, while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, reproduction of the mode determination voice is started in response to detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b (determination button). Then, normally, the display of the display screen 31a shifts from the presentation mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the screen that was displayed when the game was interrupted) in accordance with the completion of the reproduction of the mode determination voice. . That is, normally, the display of the effect mode selection screen is maintained until reproduction of the mode determination voice is completed.
However, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode determination voice, the display of the display screen 31a changes from the production mode selection screen to the in-game screen (specifically, the acquired special game information). Shift to the screen at the start of the variable display of the special pattern based on).
At this time, if pending winning occurs while the mode determination voice is being played back by track y, information is registered that designates playback of the pending winning sound on track a while continuing playback of track y. At the same time, in track b, information designating reproduction of the fluctuating effect sound is registered.
As a result, when pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode determination voice, the display of the display screen 31a is shifted from the performance mode selection screen to the game screen while the mode determination voice is continuously reproduced. At the same time, the reproduction of the pending winning sound and the reproduction of the fluctuating effect sound are started. At this time, the mode determination voice is reproduced to the end.
For example, when pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode determination voice A, the reproduction of the pending winning sound and the variable performance sound are started while the reproduction of the mode determining voice A is continued accordingly. At this time, the display on the display screen 31a shifts from the presentation mode selection screen to the in-game screen in accordance with the occurrence of the pending winning.
As described above, the determination (confirmation) of the selection of the performance mode can be clearly indicated to the player, and the situation in which the player cannot recognize whether the selection of the performance mode is confirmed can be prevented. becomes possible.

On the other hand, as described above, the button sound effect c is made up of a performance duration of 1.0 [s]. As a result, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is completed (finished) after 1.0 [s] from its start.
In particular, as described above, when pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice, the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is interrupted accordingly. On the other hand, even if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is not interrupted accordingly.
Specifically, the button effect sound c, the pending winning sound, and the fluctuating effect sound are registered (assigned) to different tracks. In this embodiment, as described above, the button sound effect c is always registered (assigned) to the track y and reproduced by the track y. On the other hand, the pending prize winning sound is always registered (assigned) to the track a and reproduced by the track a. On the other hand, the fluctuating effect sound is always registered (assigned) to the track b and reproduced by the track b.
Here, as described above, while the effect mode selection screen is being displayed, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the effect mode selection screen to the customer waiting effect screen in response to detection of the pressing operation of the down key button (back button). , the reproduction of the button sound effect c is started.
At this time, if pending winning occurs while track y is reproducing button sound c, information designating playback of the pending winning sound is registered in track a while track y continues to be played accordingly. At the same time, information designating reproduction of the fluctuating effect sound is registered in the track b.
As a result, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the effect mode selection screen to the customer waiting effect screen while continuing to reproduce the button sound effect c. , the reproduction of the pending winning sound and the reproduction of the fluctuating effect sound are started. At this time, the button sound effect c is reproduced to the end.
As described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the production mode is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the selection of the production mode has been interrupted. Become.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation of pressing the down key button (back button) may be disabled while the mode explanation voice is being reproduced (during the period from the start to the end of the mode explanation voice reproduction). do not have.
That is, during the period from the start to the completion of reproduction of the mode explanation voice, even if the pressing operation of the down key button (back button) is detected, the display on the display screen 31a changes from the production mode selection screen to the customer waiting production screen. , and the reproduction of the button sound effect c may not be started.
Further, in this embodiment, at least during the reproduction of the mode determination voice (during the period from the start to the completion of reproduction of the mode determination voice), the left/right key buttons (select button) and the down key button (back button) are pressed. A configuration in which the operation is disabled may be adopted.
As a result, while the mode decision voice is being reproduced, the presentation mode selection screen is being displayed, but even if the pressing operation of the left/right key buttons (selection buttons) is detected, the presentation mode selection screen is displayed. A configuration can be employed in which the type of the effect mode explanation image g is not changed and the reproduction of the mode explanation voice is not started. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the reproduction of the button sound effect c is not started even if the pressing operation of the down key button (back button) is detected during the reproduction of the mode determination voice.

(Processing executed by production control board 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.

(Sub CPU initialization processing)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is arranged on the performance control board 300 . The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
CPU310 of the production|presentation control board 300 starts a sub CPU initialization process (not shown) according to generation|occurrence|production of the reset signal by a reset circuit.
In the sub CPU initialization process, the CPU 310 is initialized by initializing various registers, various timers, etc. used by the CPU 310 . Next, an effect random number update process for updating various random numbers for effect is executed. After that, the production random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes, which will be described later, are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes command reception interrupt processing (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200 .
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured including a clock generation circuit. A clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts sub-timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved in the saving area of the DRAM 304 .
In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis processing will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, progress of the production is managed based on the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area and the value of the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has come for each of the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information regarding the display effect (the effect start command specifying the start of the display effect, the display priority change command, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, the command information regarding the sound effect (the effect start command specifying the start of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, the command information regarding the lamp effect (the effect start command specifying the start of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, the command information regarding the movable body presentation (the presentation start command specifying the start of the movable body presentation, etc.) is stored in the movable body instruction buffer area.

In step S31-5, register return processing is executed, and the sub timer interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, as shown in FIG. 51, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value specifying command has been received. And when it determines with having received the setting value specification command, the value corresponding to the setting value which the said setting value specification command specifies is memorize|stored in the setting value storage area of DRAM304 of the production|presentation control board 300 (setting).

In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. When it is determined that the game state designation command is received, information designating the game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") designated by the received game state designation command is saved.
In step S32-3, a pending command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The pending command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-5, variation command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. Variation command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-8, error command reception processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S31-4) is performed. In the error command reception process, it is determined whether or not an error designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that an error designation command has been received, a process for reporting the occurrence of an error designated by the received error designation command is executed.

(Hold command reception processing)
Next, the pending command reception process of step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, as shown in FIG. 52, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and a hold number designation command is issued. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specifying command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"). If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process moves to step S36-3, and the pending number designation command does not specify an increase in the pending number (designates that the pending number has decreased by "1") If so (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the pending number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the pending number designation command designates an increase in the special figure 1 pending number.
And, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 reservation number, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is started.
At this time, as the mode of the reserved symbol h, a mode corresponding to the value set in the effect mode flag area is selected.
In addition, as a display area for displaying the reserved design h, among the four display positions included in the reserved design display area b2, the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area (storage area 1 ~ storage A display position corresponding to area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 reservation number, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, a reserved design display area b3 is set as a display area for displaying the reserved design h.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number.
And, when it is determined that the reservation number designation command designates the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter. Also, the display position of each reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is terminated.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed to the reserved design display area b2 (corresponding to the storage area 1). display position) to the reserved design display area b1.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shift to the corresponding display position.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command designates the subtraction of the special figure 2 reservation number, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter. Also, the display position of the reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is terminated.
Also, the display position of the reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b3 is shifted from the reserved design display area b3 to the reserved design display area b1.

(Prefetch command reception processing)
Next, the prefetch command reception processing in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, as shown in FIG. 53, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received. If it is determined that a prefetch designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, where the prefetch designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, prefetch information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead specification command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as pending information.
A suspension information storage area capable of storing suspension information is set in the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 . In addition, as a reservation information storage area, a first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
The first pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

The second pending information storage area includes one storage area as a storage area capable of storing pending information. And, in the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each piece of reservation information includes symbol information indicating the type of the stopped symbol.

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the prefetch designation command ("lost design" or "big hit design") is analyzed. to generate hold information including symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stopped symbol. Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the first pending information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the prefetch designation command ("lost design", "big hit design" or "small hit symbol”) is analyzed to generate hold information including symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol. Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the second pending information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "prefetch target pending information". In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information whose notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed prior to the prefetch target pending information is referred to as "preceding pending information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, "1" is set in the flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 during execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, (1) prefetch target hold information is hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "1") or more precedent hold information is stored (3) that there is no preceding hold information indicating the winning pattern (“big hit pattern” or “small hit pattern”), (4) that the time saving control is being stopped, (5) jackpot game state is not occurring, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
It should be noted that the content of the look-ahead advance notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, not all the conditions (1) to (5) above, but in the case of one or more conditions among the above (1) to (5), as a configuration that is determined to meet the pre-reading notice effect execution condition I don't mind. Further, conditions different from the conditions (1) to (5) above may be included as conditions for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect lottery.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading notice effect lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, first, a pre-reading notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number and the pre-reading notice effect lottery table.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

At step S33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) is selected and set. At this time, a mode corresponding to the value set in the effect mode flag area is selected and set as the mode of the look-ahead advance notice effect.

(variation command reception processing)
Next, the variation command reception process of step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing.
When the variation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is transmitted. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to symbol type designation commands and variation pattern designation commands.
In step S34-2, stop effect determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined based on the type of stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command and the value set in the effect mode flag area. do. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the fluctuation production determination process, the content of the special figure fluctuation production is selected and set.
The control ROM 302 of the production control board 300 contains a combination of a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) (variation scale pattern), and a variation production number (special figure variation production mode). , is stored in a variable effect lottery table in which the correspondences of .
In addition, as a fluctuation production lottery table, a fluctuation production lottery table corresponding to each production mode ("production mode A" to "production mode C") is stored.
In the variable effect determination process, first, the value set in the effect mode flag area is confirmed, and the variable effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, among the variable effect numbers registered in the variable effect lottery table, the variable effect number corresponding to the combination of the variable mode number specified by the variable mode designation command and the variable pattern number specified by the variable pattern designation command is selected. Decide (choose).

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the announcement effect determination process, the contents of the main announcement effect are selected and set.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a preliminary announcement performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the preliminary announcement performance lottery random number and the main preliminary announcement performance number (mode of the main preliminary performance) is registered.
In addition, as the advance notice effect lottery table, the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value set in the effect mode flag area and the variable effect number is stored.
In order to determine the aspect of the main notice effect, first, a notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the value set in the effect mode flag area and the variable effect number selected in step S34-3 are confirmed, and the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the main notice effect lottery number is determined (judged) based on the obtained notice effect lottery random number and the read-out notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data of the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the variable effect number determined in step S34-3 is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area.
Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the main notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process of step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 55, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, where the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, stop effect start processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-7) is performed. In the stop effect start process, the content of the stop effect is selected/set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is obtained, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the obtained stop effect number is read out. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception processing of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, as shown in FIG. 56, the process proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S31-4) is performed.
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, the contents of the winning effect are selected and set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, when the special game state (big win game state or small win game state) to be started corresponds to the "first hit", the effect scenario data corresponding to the "BIG bonus effect" is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the "BIG bonus effect" is started.
On the other hand, when the special game state (big win game state or small win game state) to be started corresponds to the "REG bonus" won based on the first special symbol lottery, the production scenario data corresponding to the "REG bonus production" is changed. read out. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the "REG bonus effect" is started.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position or the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the body frame unit, and , does not protrude rightward from the right edge of the body frame unit. As a result, when the body frame unit is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are prevented from coming into contact with the floor or the wall, and damage to the operation ring 72 can be prevented.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the game start condition is satisfied (a pending winning occurs) during the reproduction of the mode explanation voice during the selection of the production mode (during the display of the production mode selection screen), the mode explanation voice is reproduced. After the end, the reproduction of the game-related effect sound (pending prize winning sound, fluctuating effect sound, etc.) is started. This prevents the notification of the mode explanation voice from overlapping with the notification of the effect sound related to the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the notification of the mode explanation voice interferes with the notification of the game-related effect sound.
On the other hand, if the condition for starting the game is satisfied (pending winning occurs) during the reproduction of the mode determination voice triggered by the confirmation of the selection of the production mode, the production sound related to the game is played without terminating the reproduction of the mode determination voice. Playback of (holding prize winning sound, fluctuating effect sound, etc.) is started. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the selection of the production mode has been confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the selection of the effect mode has been confirmed.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the selection of the performance mode has been confirmed, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance sound related to the game. .

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an operation ring 72 rotatable within a range from the initial position to the maximum position, and a shooting control circuit 425 for controlling the shooting of game balls according to the rotation of the operation ring 72. . The operation torque required to start rotating the operation ring 72 from the initial position is defined as the first operation torque, and the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is defined as the first operation torque. 2 operation torque, and the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is the third operation torque. The torque is greater than the second operating torque and is less than or equal to twice the second operating torque.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the third operation torque is set to be larger than the second operation torque and not more than twice the second operation torque. As a result, the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is reduced, and the operation torque of the operation ring 72 within the range from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is reduced from the left-handed reference position to the maximum position. A sudden increase in the operation torque of the operation means within the range of up to is eliminated. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque. As a result, the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque becomes small, and the range from the initial position to the predetermined reference position is reduced with respect to the operation torque of the operation ring 72 for starting rotation from the initial position. The operation torque of the operation ring 72 in the inside does not suddenly increase. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation angle from the initial position to the left-handed reference position of the operation ring 72 is defined as the first operation angle, and the operation angle from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as the second operation angle, the second The first operation angle is half or less of the second operation angle. This makes it possible to facilitate the operation of the operation ring 72 .

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the game start condition is satisfied (pending winning occurs) while the mode explanation voice is being played while the production mode is being selected (while the production mode selection screen is being displayed), the mode explanation voice is played. After the completion of the game, the reproduction of the game-related effect sound (pending winning sound, variable effect sound, etc.) is started.
However, if the game start condition is satisfied (pending winning occurs) while the mode explanation voice is being played while the production mode is being selected (while the production mode selection screen is being displayed), the mode explanation voice will continue to be played. Then, after setting the volume of the mode explanation voice to "0" (muted state), the reproduction of the game-related effect sound (pending winning sound, variable effect sound, etc.) may be started.
This configuration also prevents the notification of the mode explanation voice from overlapping the notification of the effect sound related to the game, and prevents the notification of the mode explanation voice from interfering with the notification of the effect sound related to the game.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, even if a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c is not interrupted accordingly.
However, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound effect c, the reproduction of the button sound effect c may be interrupted accordingly.
Alternatively, when a pending winning occurs during the reproduction of the button sound c, the volume of the button sound c is set to "0" (muted) while the button sound c continues to be reproduced. state).

1 pachinko machine 6 firing handle unit 22 various speakers 31a display screen 71 handle base 72 operation ring 73 coil spring 74 face cover 200 main control board 300 effect control board

Claims (2)

an outer frame;
a body frame attached to the outer frame;
an operation unit provided on the body frame and rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position;
A launch control means for controlling the launch of game balls according to the rotation of the operation unit,
the operation portion includes a plurality of finger hook portions protruding radially outward,
The plurality of finger hook portions have different projection amounts,
When the operation portion is arranged at the initial position, the plurality of finger hook portions do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame and are positioned rightward from the right edge of the main body frame. does not protrude into
When the operation portion is arranged at the maximum position, the plurality of finger hook portions do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame and are positioned rightward from the right edge of the main body frame. does not protrude into
As the effect sound, there are a first effect sound notified during selection of the effect mode and a second effect sound notified when the selection of the effect mode is confirmed,
In this game machine, when a game start condition is established during the notification of the first effect sound, the notification of the first effect sound is terminated in the middle and the notification of the effect sound related to the game is started . an outer frame;
a body frame attached to the outer frame;
an operation unit provided on the body frame and rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position;
A launch control means for controlling the launch of game balls according to the rotation of the operation unit,
the operation portion includes a plurality of finger hook portions protruding radially outward,
The plurality of finger hook portions have different projecting amounts,
When the operating portion is arranged at the initial position, the plurality of finger hook portions do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame and are positioned rightward from the right edge of the main body frame. does not protrude into
When the operation portion is arranged at the maximum position, the plurality of finger hook portions do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame and are positioned rightward from the right edge of the main body frame. does not protrude into
As the effect sound, there are a first effect sound notified during selection of the effect mode and a second effect sound notified when the selection of the effect mode is confirmed,
In this game machine, when a game start condition is established during notification of the second effect sound, the notification of the effect sound relating to the game is started without ending the notification of the second effect sound in the middle.

Images